KODAK Preps

Imposition Software
User Guide

Version 9.0

English

2016-06-15
Copyright
© Kodak, 2016. All rights reserved.

Some documentation is distributed in Portable Document Format (PDF). You may reproduce such
documentation from the PDF file for internal use. Copies produced from the PDF file must be
reproduced in whole.

Trademarks
Kodak, Creo, Colorflow, Connect, Evo, Harmony, Matchprint, Powerpack, Profile Wizard, DigiCap,
NexPress, PressProof, Pandora, Preps, Prinergy, InSite, Maxtone, SquareSpot and Staccato are
trademarks of Kodak.

Google is a registered trademark of Google Inc. Pantone is a registered trademark of Pantone Inc.

FCC compliance
Any Kodak equipment referred to in this document complies with the requirements in part 15 of the
FCC Rules for a Class A digital device. Operation of the Kodak equipment in a residential area may
cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception, requiring the operator to take whatever
steps are necessary to correct the interference.

Equipment recycling
In the European Union, this symbol indicates that when the last user wishes to
discard this product, it must be sent to appropriate facilities for recovery and
recycling.

Contact your local Kodak representative or refer to http://www.kodak.com/go

/recycle/ for additional information on the collection and recovery programs
available for this product.

REACH
Please consult http://www.kodak.com/go/REACH for information about the presence of
substances included on the candidate list according to article 59(1) of Regulation (EC) No. 1907
/2006 (REACH).

http://graphics.kodak.com/

Eastman Kodak Company

343 State Street
Rochester, NY 14650 U.S.A.
Content
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Introducing Preps software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Task-based views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Related prepress workflow systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
General tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Summary of job steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Creating different job types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic steps for printing the output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Closing a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Reopening an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3 Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Page terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pages being prepared for layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pages being planned for layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pages in layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Input files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting up the Files list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Files list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
[+] and [–] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Preparing suitable PDF input files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Previewing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Run-list pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting up a product run list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Working with placeholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pages view reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Pages workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Page trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
View menu in the Pages view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
 Show Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show Page Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show Page Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show Trim Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show Bleed Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show File Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Show Folio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Pages List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Add Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Add Blank Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Folio list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
C, M, Y, K Throughout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Black Throughout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
View by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
List columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Part Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Folio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Run List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Planned Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Actual Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Run list page properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Part Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Run List Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Page Size, W, H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Folio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Planned Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Actual Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Content Page section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Page Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pages on press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adding content pages directly to a layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjusting the layout details for a product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Managing pages on press-run layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Shingling the page images for creep compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Bleed margins for sections with bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
 Press Runs view reference for pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
View menu in the Press Runs view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show Page Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show Page Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show Trim Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show Bleed Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show File Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Show File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Show Template Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Show Marks, Show Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Show Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Show Group Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Show Folio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Content page properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Page Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Page Size, W, H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Page Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Template page properties (common) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Page Number, Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Finished Page Size, W, H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Position on Sheet, H, V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Page Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Content Bleed Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Page Bottling (Rotation) and Shingling (Creep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Page Bottling (Rotation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Stock-based progressive bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Shingling (Creep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Shift Page Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Vertical Shingling (Creep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Common resources for planning pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Managing the common colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Managing the common folios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Standard page size conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4 Press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Flexible tools for creating layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Section terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Press-run sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Product sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Multiple sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sub-sections (Ribbons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Resources for press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
About the lists in the Resources pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fold patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Customizing or creating a custom fold pattern resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Customizing an existing fold pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Creating a custom fold pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Using the Create Imposition method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fold Pattern dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fold Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Available Fold Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
JDF Fold Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Custom fold patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Pattern name and grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Thumbnail diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Bind Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Saving a job as a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating a new media resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating a new stock resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating a new mark resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Press Runs view reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
The View menu in the Press Runs view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Show Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Show Page Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Page Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Trim Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Bleed Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show File Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Template Page Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Marks, Show Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Group Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Show Folio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Press Runs List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Duplicate Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Delete Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Move Down, Move Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Press Run ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Work Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
 Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Template Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Run Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Generate Press Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Work styles for press sheets and webs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Sheetwise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Work and Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Work and Tumble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Press Runs workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Direct Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Add Independent Pages / Convert to Spreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Step & Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
AutoGang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Show Page Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Show Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hide Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hide Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hide Gutter Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Group, Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Layout selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Single View, Multi View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Layout dimensions in the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Press run properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fold Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Template Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Signature Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Auto Select Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Section Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Binding Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Work Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Width, Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Punch Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Binding styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Perfect Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Saddle Stitched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
 Come and Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Cut and Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Flat Work (no binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Mixed binding styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Press-run section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Part Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Part Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
First Page Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Template Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fold Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Binding Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reference Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lay out additional page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fold Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fold Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Bind Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Head Trim, Foot Trim, Face Trim, Spine, Front Lip, Back Lip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Planned Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Creating press-run layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using the Layouts Search tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Building press runs using template, fold pattern, or step-and-repeat pattern resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using AutoSelect to generate press runs from a run list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Multiple imposition sections on a press run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating an imposition without using a Layouts resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating a cut-and-stack press run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multiweb layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating come-and-go layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Multiple product support with Come and Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Creating a sub-section (ribbon) press with a Custom Fold Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Step 1: Create the Custom Folding Pattern that will be used to generate the sub-section (ribbon) layout: . . . . . . . 100
Step 2: Use the Custom Folding Pattern to create the sub-section (ribbon) press run: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Managing press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Working with layout sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Manually adding press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Adding or replacing a press run's stock or media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Adding marks to a press-run layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Ganging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Ganged flat-work layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Manually creating a ganged layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Step-and-repeat layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Step-and-repeat properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Step & Repeat Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Arrange Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Stagger Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Stagger Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Working with ganged page groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setting gutters between ganged page rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removing a ganged page from a press run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5 Assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Product intent and assembly planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Preparing a job assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Adding a product via the Products pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Starting an assembly job with product intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Managing product assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using drag and drop to edit an assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Change the section sequence or binding type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Create a part with mixed binding styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Combine two sections and their page counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Generating an assembly's press-run layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Assembly view reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Products list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Product and part details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Assembly workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Split Section tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Toggle product view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Color coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Product and part details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Visual information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Generate Press Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Product properties (assembly intent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Product Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Job ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Due Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Planned Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Binding Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Planned Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Generate Press Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Part properties (assembly intent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Part Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Part Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Planned Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
 Trim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Binding Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Largest Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Planned Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Product section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Part Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Part Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
First Page Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Trim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Template Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fold Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Binding Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reference Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Lay out additional page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fold Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fold Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Bind Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Head Trim, Foot Trim, Face Trim, Spine, Front Lip, Back Lip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Planned Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6 Output printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
High level steps for printing the output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Printing job layout reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Output Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Default Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CIP3/PPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Generate multipage cut blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
CIP3 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Enable PPF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Include JDF folding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Include HTML file with JDF output for WST equipment setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Split File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Common Print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Send to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Comment text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
General Print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Specify print range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Output Format, Divide by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Color Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Emulsion side down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Embed CIP3 cutting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Color separations setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Setting up the color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Defining a spot color's process equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Adding a spot color to a job's color list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Color Separations Print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Web growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Scaling to compensate for web growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Applying a scaling set to job output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Web Growth Print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Creating and managing the scaling sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Web Growth Compensation Sets window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Scaling Set setup dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7 Media and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Media configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Creating new media resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Creating and using tile sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Media Configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Nickname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Short name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Divided output path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Alignment, Horizontal, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Media list in the Resources pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Nickname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
 Connecting a printer for direct printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Determining the punch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Turning off punch marks in the output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using custom media sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Custom Size dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Moving the Printers folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Media-related files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Editing a PPD file using PPD Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Checking a media's job log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
General mark tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adding a new resource to the Marks list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adding a mark to a press-run layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Deleting a mark from the Marks list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Editing a placed mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Dragging a mark to a new position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Copying marks between press sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Creating a mark group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Managing placed crop and fold marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Legacy static marks in older files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Marks Preferences settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Marks Place Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Text Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Sheet Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Other Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Common settings for SmartMarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Settings for identifying marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Mark Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Settings for anchoring marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Anchor to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Mark Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Margins or offsets (various labels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Lock mark to this position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Settings for placing marks on press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Front, Back, Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Bring to front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Mirror on back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Place on every . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Only on Job Layout Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Restrict to section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Lock mark to this position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Settings for saving your mark edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Mark types whose colors can be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Mark anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
"Bring to Front" for overlapped marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Mark Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Custom and duplicating marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Mark image files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Bar codes in custom marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Micro dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adding a new custom mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Custom Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Image file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Creating a new duplicating mark (color bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Duplicating Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Image file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Size Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Duplicate from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Do not apply workflow color calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Anchor to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Text marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Text-mark variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Text Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Vertical Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Flat Identifier Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Text Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Creating a CJK text mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Line Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Horizontal, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Rectangle Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Horizontal, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Crop Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Offset from page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place crop marks on outside of imposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Bring to Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fold Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Collation Mark settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Step distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Optional Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Vertical Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Step optional text with mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Mixed Binding Collation mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Static collation marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Mark Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Left or X Ctr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Bottom or Y Ctr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Step distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Bearer Bars settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
9 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Profiles and preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Profiles for storing default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting your preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using custom profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Report modified input files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Autocenter run list pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Show dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Show Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Anti-alias Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Common Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Profile Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Save Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Language (Windows only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Stock Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Sections Position in Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Auto Divide and PDF Trim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
 Auto Divide Stock as Fold Patterns are added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Auto Apply PDF TrimSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Step-and-Repeat Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Step & Repeat Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Arrange Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
New Step & Repeat Placeholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Job Report Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Company Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Output Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Files and folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
File types and folder locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Job files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Software-support file types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Standard file locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
The difference between a job file and template file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Folders and files that you can move or share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Sharing folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Folders Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Managing job notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Licensing Control dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Software License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Licensed to, Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Prinergy Floating License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
License Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Checking the current session's status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10 Automation support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Mark rules for JDF automation and AutoGang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating a mark rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Criteria for mark rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Rule Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Rule Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Product Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Part Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Workstyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Binding Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
[Device] Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Stock Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Number of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Number of Webs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Sheet Size (Min) W and H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
 Sheet Size (Max) W and H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Criteria for auto signature creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Press Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Front Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Back Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
JDF automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
JDF jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Completing a JDF job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
JDF Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Signature Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Match only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Create only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Match then create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Matching Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Check sheet size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Check work style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Match finishing properties to fold pattern templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Check head and foot trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Check fold pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Check fold orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Match Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Signature Creation Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Add SmartMarks based on mark rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Add JDF error marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Error Mark Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
JDF Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Use bleed values in JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Remove all marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
JDF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Format the output based on this specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Use relative paths for marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Use relative paths for input files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
JDF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
AutoGang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Creating an AutoGang preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Generating autoganged press runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
AutoGang Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Replace current sheet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Press Sheet Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Create multiple sheets (for selected products) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Create first best sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
AutoGang hot folders for Prinergy systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting the root hot folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting up an AutoGang hot folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Autoganging a job for Prinergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Shingling and Bottling Rules Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
11 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
User interface viewing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Menu shortcuts - Windows OS-based computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Menu shortcuts - Mac OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Other shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

1
1 Overview

Welcome to the user guide for the Kodak Preps imposition software.

Introducing Preps software

The Preps software is a prepress tool that you use to create press run layouts for
bound-work impositions, ganged flat work, and step-and-repeat work. You can
work on the fly in an interactive workspace, use stored templates for frequently
repeated layouts, and print the production output to common file formats. It also
supports varying degrees of workflow automation.
You can impose PDF input files or unpopulated job pages for sheetfed or web
press-run layouts and for packaging label and flexible bag printers, and send the
output to any PostScript-compatible device such as a computer-to-plate (CTP)
device, imagesetter, on-demand printer, digital printer, wide-format imposition
proofer, or laser printer.
Preps software is used in standalone PDF environments as well as in all popular
workflow solutions, including Prinergy systems and third-party systems (for
example, Agfa ApogeeX, Rampage, Global Graphics Harlequin, Artwork Systems
Nexus, TrueFlow software).

System requirements
For system requirements and supported operating systems, check the Preps
Release Notes for your version. Preps documentation is available on the Kodak
services and support portal.

Features
Preps 7.0 and later feature one license type. Earlier versions of the Preps software
offered different license types that enabled different feature sets. If you upgraded
from the Preps 6.x software to the Preps 7.x software, you have access to the
feature set that was previously available only with the Pro license, including:
Unlimited sheet size, up to maximum supported
Mixed binding styles
Assembly view
Web growth compensation
Multiple products and parts
JDF input
JDF auto signature matching (ASM)
JDF auto signature creation (ASC)
20
 AutoGang for semiautomation
AutoGang hot folders for full automation (available only with a Prinergy
Workflow or Kodak Prinergy Evo Workflow floating Preps license)
JDF binding data output
CIP3 cutting data export (JDF, PPF, PJTF)
Automatic and custom tiling
Fold Pattern resource
Automated calculation for shingling and bottling
Stock management
Automated ganging for different covers/sizes
Preps Template Migration Utility

Task-based views
Tab between dynamically updated views as you work on a job's pages, press
runs, or product assemblies, with an interactive workspace and supporting list
panes in each view.
In the Pages view, set up the product run lists with blank, placeholder, or
PDF content pages; preview individual pages and page details; adjust the
trim boxes; and reposition, scale, or rotate the PDF content.
In the Press Runs view, create and interactively edit and preview any
number of sheetfed and multiweb press runs to accommodate the job's
pages. Manage the stock, media, marks, and layout for each sheet or web.
In the Assembly view, provide the product intent for a customer job,
which can include multiple products and parts, and mixed binding styles.
Interactively plan the binding assembly of each product's parts and
sections, and autogenerate the press runs based on your planned details.
Working with the views
The way that you use the views can be affected by such factors as job types,
product requirements and complexity, the number of people who work on the
jobs, the feature set supported by your software license, and personal
preferences.
Here are a few possibilities:
You might first use the Pages view to collect the input files or define file
placeholders and set up the run list, and then switch to the Press Runs
view to build the press-run layouts.
For ganged jobs or for basic single-product, single-part jobs, you might
work entirely in the Press Runs view.
For intelligent setup of ganged press runs, you might use the AutoGang
feature in the Press Runs view.

21
 Jobs for complex publications might be done in stages.
For example, a planner, customer service representative, or senior
prepress operator might start a job by providing the product intent in the
Assembly view. The job can then be completed by a prepress operator
who creates the layouts and prints the press runs.
In a JDF-based workflow, you use the Assembly view to provide any
information that was not received via JDF, and then check the auto-
generated press-run layouts in the Press Runs view.
User interface tools
Drag-and-drop functionality for placing and moving items
Toolbars and keyboard shortcuts for most tasks
Context (right-click) menus for managing the resources
Triangle icons for expanding or collapsing the panes
Adjustable dividers for resizing the panes
Instant access to properties of items that you select in the workspace
Dynamic updating in all affected areas when edits are made in any area
Menus and dialog boxes for less frequently performed tasks
Help menu for user information and demonstration movies
Horizontal and vertical rulers and guides in the Pages and Press Runs
views, enabling you to determine where to place content and align objects,
as well as allowing detailed measuring capabilities
User interface regions
The user interface panes are grouped by general purpose in the left side, center
area, and right side of the window:
The left side of the window contains lists of job assets, from which you
can select elements for building a job.
The center region is your primary job-building area.
The right side gives you detailed control over selected job elements.
All information is dynamically updated as you make changes in related areas.

22
Region Name Description
number

1 Products Use the Products pane to view and manage the job
structure.
For manual layouts, you can select and drag sections to
the Press Runs workspace.

2 Files In the Files list, you add customer PDF input files,
create placeholder files, and select file pages to add to
a run list or press-run layout.

3 Resources Use the Resources pane to select and manage your

resources for building press runs.
Media list
Stock list
Marks list
Layouts pane:
Templates list
Fold Patterns list
Step & Repeat Patterns list
Search tool

4 View tabs Toggle between views for primary aspects of a job

Pages view
Press Runs view
Assembly view

5 Workspace Review, rearrange, and edit items in the workspace to

dynamically update the properties.
In the Pages view, preview pages and check trim
boxes.
In the Assembly view, plan multiple products
and parts.
In the Press Runs view, build and check press-
run layouts.
Use viewing tools and menu options to control which
details are displayed.

6 Summary
lists

23
 Region Name Description
number

In each view, manage a list of all applicable job items.

You can arrange the rows and columns, change the sort
order and width of columns, and expand or collapse the
rows.
Select an item in the Press Runs List or Pages List to
display it in the workspace. In the Assembly workspace,
you can toggle between graphical and list formats.

7 Properties Use the Properties pane to view and edit the settings of
selected job items. All applicable panes and lists are
dynamically updated with your changes.
Select an item in a workspace, summary list, or
Products list to display its settings in the Properties
pane.

Related prepress workflow systems

The way that this tool fits into your prepress workflow depends on your
operations. A downstream system in the workflow might require your jobs to be
populated or not populated with customer content before you print the output
files.
Populated jobs contain actual content files.
A prepress system might refine, impose, and proof the pages, and then
send you the output as PDF pages. You add these page files to a job,
create the layouts, and send the output back to the same system or to
another system in the workflow for final proof and plate production.
For other workflows, you might create unpopulated jobs that use file
placeholders or blank pages, and the content pages are assigned later in
the workflow.
The way that you output the jobs can also vary between workflow systems,
depending on whether the downstream system uses features such as hot folders,
manual imposition import, JDF automation, and automated page assignment
(APA).
The Preps software engine is integrated in the Prinergy Workflow software for
the automatic creation and import of impositions. Full-access versions of Preps
can also be opened from within the Workshop or Workspace user interfaces in
Prinergy or the Prinergy Evo Client software when using floating licenses. For
more information, see the Prinergy Workflow or Prinergy Evo Workflow user
documentation.

2
24
2 Jobs

Many of your jobs can be completed using variations of a few basic tasks.

General tips
This table summarizes useful tips, such as how to select, delete, rearrange, and
access the properties of items.

Option Description

Selecting an object in Displays its settings in the Properties pane

the workspace or
Products list

Selecting a press run, Displays the layout in the workspace (or the first
sheet, web, or surface layout of multiple webs, with the web-selection list); if
in the Press Runs List a press run is selected, also displays its settings in the
Properties pane

Selecting a page in Displays its preview in the workspace and its settings
the Pages List in the Properties pane

Double-clicking an Displays its Modify Imposition dialog box

imposition in the
workspace

Double-clicking a Adds that resource to the layout in its default position

stock, media, mark, or
template in a
Resources pane list

Right-clicking an item Displays a context menu of options for that item or list
in a Resources pane
list or in the Products
list

Double-clicking Makes it editable, and in some cases, displays a list of

inside an editable text selections
box or column

Tabbing out of a text Applies your edit and moves the cursor to the next
box that you edited text box, if applicable

25
 Option Description

Deleting versus Typically, removing takes an item out of the workspace

removing but retains it in the job, and deleting makes it
permanently unavailable

Pressing Delete To remove a ganged content page and its template

versus Option page, select the page and press Delete; to remove only
/Alt+Delete to the content page, press Command/Ctrl+Delete
remove a ganged
page

Dragging rows in the Rearranges the press runs for your viewing
Press Runs List convenience

Dragging sections in Can be used to combine sections or change their

the Assembly binding style or sequence; updates the page and
workspace section numbering accordingly

Editing a property When multiple selected items are set to different

with multiple values ( values, your edit sets them all to the same value.
--, Mixed, Multiple)

Summary of job steps

The following steps summarize the main aspects of most single-product jobs. Not
all steps must be performed in a specific order, many can be combined or
automated, and there are flexible ways to perform most steps.

Requirements:
You need a solid prepress background and an understanding of imposition
concepts and workflow.

1. (Optional) Define the product intent, including the product and part page
counts.
2. Add the input files to the job.
Note: You can skip this step for unpopulated jobs.
3. Set up the run list with PDF, placeholder, or blank pages.
Note: You can skip this step for ganged jobs.
4. Add media and stock to a press run.
5. Create a press-run layout with page positions, content, marks, and trims,
as needed.
6. Continue building the press runs to accommodate the pages for this job.

7. 26
 7. Save the job, and print the output files.
8. (Optional) Save the job as a template or fold pattern for reuse.

Creating different job types

The way that you create jobs can be affected by such factors as job types,
product requirements and complexity, the number of people who work on jobs,
and personal preferences.
This topic provides brief summaries of the steps involved. For details, see the
applicable topics.
Note: Work on only one job at a time.
Choose a method:

Job type Steps

Basic jobs
1. Select File > New.
2. Set up the run list in the Pages view.
3. Build the layouts in the Press Runs view.

Manual ganging jobs

1. Select File > New.
Jobs with a single product
and binding style 2. Set up the Files list.
3. Build the layouts in the Press Runs view.

Jobs with multiple

1. Select File > New.
products, parts, binding
styles 2. Use the Products list and Properties pane to
(without using product define the parts and sections.
intent or the Assembly 3. Set up the run list in the Pages view.
view)
4. Build the layouts in the Press Runs view.

Jobs planned via product

1. Select File > New Job With Product Intent
intent in the Assembly
and provide the available information.
view
2. If another product is needed in this job,
select File > Add New Product Intent.
3. Check and refine the job structure and
properties in the Assembly view.
4. Click Generate Press Runs.
5. Set up the run list in the Pages view.

27

6.
 Job type Steps

6. Check and finalize the layouts in the Press

Runs view.

JDF automation jobs

1. Select File > Open.
2. Locate and open the JDF file.
3. Check and refine or complete the generated
job structure and properties in the Assembly
view.
4. If you made structural changes, regenerate
the press runs.
5. Set up the run list in the Pages view.
6. Check and finalize the layouts in the Press
Runs view.

AutoGang jobs
1. Select File > New.
(standalone)
2. Set up the Files list.
3. Set up the AutoGang list.
4. Generate the autoganged press runs.
5. Check and finalize the layouts in the Press
Runs view.

Basic steps for printing the output

When you print the output, you provide basic information, such as the print
range. You can also set up advanced options for color mapping and web growth
compensation.

1. (Optional) In the Preferences dialog box, load a suitable profile or set

options as needed on the Output tab.
You can set default values for:
Output type (Printer, PDF, PS, JDF, PJTF, or PPF)
CIP3/PPF (Generate multi-page cut blocks, CIP3 units)
JDF (Include JDF folding data, Include HTML file with JDF output
for WST equipment setup)
PDF (Split File Name)
Display punch mark

28
 Print side center marks
Ignore split file output errors
Print crop marks for bleed bounds
Auto rotate for best fit
Center image on media
Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF
Scale shingled pages (Proportionally or Anamorphically)
Shingle crop marks
Remove crop marks when exceeding the center of gutters
Skip device warning
2. Select File > Print.
3. In the Send to list in the Print dialog box, select the output file type or
Printer.
4. Accept or change the Media.
Any change that you make to the media selection applies to the entire
output.
5. Set up other print options on the dialog box tabs as needed.
6. Click Print.
7. If you are printing divided output and the Print File ID dialog box appears,
type an identifier to include in each file name, and click OK.
8. If printing to file, specify a file name and folder location for the output.
If you generate divided output for media configurations that are set up with
divided output paths, the files are placed in those folders and you cannot
redirect the output.

Closing a job
You can save and close a job at any stage, and you can store its layouts as a
template for future reuse. You can also save an imposition as a reusable custom
fold pattern.
Choose a task:

To save the Select File > Save or Save As, and accept or change the file
job: name and location. The default location is the same folder that
was used for the last save. The job is saved with a .job file
name extension.
If the saved job contains fully defined press runs, the file
contains all the necessary data to allow the job to be
reopened and printed or reprinted.
You can save and close a job with product intent only,
and then reopen the job later to complete the layouts.

29
 To store any Select File > Save as Template.
unique The template is saved with a .tpl file name extension.
layouts in the If you save a job as a template, information about each unique
job for reuse: press-run layout is stored as a template signature.

To close the Select File > Close.

job window:

To close the Select File > Exit.

software:

Reopening an existing job

A job that was previously saved from any version of the software can be
reopened when it needs to be completed, revised, printed, or reprinted.
You can save and close a job with product intent only, and then reopen the job
later to complete the layouts.
Also, note the following points about file compatibility between software
versions:
You can use the Preps 7.x software to open jobs or templates that were
created in any version of the software up to the version of the software
you have installed.
When you use the Preps 7.x software to reopen and save a legacy job (for
example, from Preps 6 or earlier), it becomes a Preps 7.x job.
You cannot use versions earlier than Preps 7.x to open Preps 7.x jobs.
You can use any version of the Preps software to open templates that
were created in any version of the software. Any unsupported features are
typically ignored.
Static marks in a legacy file will be converted to SmartMarks or deleted,
depending on the mark type.
You can open a previously output JDF file to reprint or revise the original
job.

1. Select File > Open.

2. Locate and open the JOB or JDF file.
3. Respond to any messages about issues with the job file.
For example, messages that tell you if a legacy job contains static marks or
if its referenced template is missing.
4. Make your changes, and save the job.
The JOB file format stores the job layout information with no reference to a
template.
Note: In earlier versions of Preps this data was stored separately in TPL
files.

3
30
3 Pages

Manage the product run lists in the Pages view, and manage the placement of
pages on the layouts in the Press Runs view. You can also create your own lists of
folio and color names to use as resources for describing individual pages.

Page terminology
Many terms can be used for pages, depending on the context.

Pages being prepared for layouts

Each file page in a job's Files list is either a PDF page or a placeholder page.
In the Pages view, you create a product's run-list pages by adding PDF pages, blank
pages, or placeholder pages to the Pages List.
You can also sort a multi-part product's run-list pages by parts and part pages.

Pages being planned for layouts

In the Assembly view, you create planned pages when you specify a page count
for a product, part, or section.
Before you add a layout resource (fold pattern or template) to a press run or
assembly, its pagination scheme defines a conceptual low folio page, which is
page 1. When you create a new press-run section from a layout resource, the low
folio page is occupied by the first page that flows into this section from the run
list.

Pages in layouts
In the Press Runs view, each content page on a layout occupies the position that is
defined by its corresponding template page.
A template page can represent an imposition page or a ganged page:
An imposition page is one page position within an even grid of same-size
pages that will be folded together to form a book signature. Each
imposition page respects the folds and bleeds of adjacent imposition
pages.
A ganged page is a page position in a flat-work layout that will not be
folded and bound. Care must be taken to prevent content overlap with
adjacent page content. Ganged pages can also be referred to as an
independent page.
Each content page on a press run represents an imposed run-list page or a
ganged instance of a page from the Files list.

31
Input files
Customer content is provided as PDF files or source document files that you must
convert to PDF. You can also work with placeholder files.

Setting up the Files list

Collect customer PDF input or placeholder files in the Files list.

Requirements:
Although the source documents might be created in various software products,
they must be submitted as PDF input files to Preps. Input files can include:
Single-page or multiple-page PDF documents from other software sources
Individual PDF page files that were exported by a prepress system
File placeholders and pages
Choose a method for building the Files list:
Drag PDF files from a local or network folder location to the Files list, or
select File > Add, and locate and add the files.
Drag files directly to a run list in the Pages view or to a layout in the Press
Runs view.
To add file placeholders, select Job > Add Placeholder, give the
placeholder a name, and specify the number of placeholder pages.
When setting up a run list, use the Add Pages tool in the Pages view to
create placeholders.
Next:
Select and drag PDF or file placeholder pages from the Files list to a product run
list in the Pages view or directly to a press sheet in the Press Runs view.
Note: The original files are not affected by any adjustments that you make within
your job. Job input files and information about any page adjustments that you
make in the layouts remain associated with the job after it is saved.

Files list
The Files list displays information about the input files and pages, including the
number of times each page appears on a press run in the job.

File Name
Displays the name of each file or file placeholder that you add to the job. Multi-
page files can be expanded to show their list of sequentially numbered pages.
This page number is appended to the File Name in the Pages List.

32
 Count
A dynamically updated value appears beside each page to indicate the number of
times that the page appears on a press run in the job.
To sort the values in the Count column in ascending (zero to highest value) or
descending (highest value to zero), click the column heading. This helps you
quickly identify items that haven't been placed.

Pages
Displays the number of pages that each file contains.

Trim
Displays the dimensions of the PDF page or placeholder page. If a PDF input file
does not specify the trim box size, the bleed box or media box size is used.

Colors
Displays the colors that are specified in the PDF input file.

[+] and [–]

Click [+] and [–] to locate and add or remove selected files.

Preparing suitable PDF input files

Generate suitable PDF input files from customer source files by following
guidelines for configuring the PDF export settings in Adobe Acrobat Distiller job
options or other desktop software.
Note: Settings that are not mentioned here are optional. For information, see the
documentation for the software that you use to generate the PDF files.

Files
Keep the default compatibility settings, or set the appropriate PDF file-
type version for the job. For example, for files that contain transparencies,
use PDF 1.5 or later.
The recommended resolution is 2400 dpi.
Do not use:
Object level compression
Auto-rotation of pages
Embedded thumbnails
Optimization for web viewing

Images
For color and grayscale images, use ZIP compression.
33
 For monochrome images:
Use CCITT Group 4 compression.
Do not use downsampling.
Do not anti-alias to gray.
Note: To create smaller files, you can use downsampling and JPEG compression if
they are acceptable to you and/or your customer. However, there will be some
data loss.

Color
Do not use an Adobe Color Settings file.
Leave color unchanged (no color management).
Apply the default document rendering intent.
Device dependent: Enable under color removal and black generation, and
preserve any transfer functions that are found.

Fonts
Embed fonts. For maximum font information, include 100% subset fonts.
If you do not embed fonts in the PDF file and the outline font used in the
source file is not available, Acrobat may substitute the Multiple Master
fonts.
Allow processing to continue if embedding fails.

Advanced settings
Convert gradients to smooth shades.
Preserve level 2 copypage semantics.
Preserve overprint settings, with a nonzero default level.
Save Adobe PDF settings inside the PDF file.
Save original JPEG images inside the PDF file, if possible.
Process DSC comments.
Preserve EPS information from DSC.
Preserve OPI comments.
Preserve document information from DSC.
Resize page and center artwork for EPS files.
Do not permit:
Adobe PostScript file to override Adobe PDF settings
PostScript X objects
Conversion of smooth lines to curves
Saving Portable Job Ticket inside PDF file

34
 Using prologue.ps and epilogue.ps
Logging DSC warnings

Previewing pages
Preview a job's pages in the Pages and Press Runs workspace panes.

1. In the View menu, select the features that you want to preview.
2. Select a page to preview its content and trim box alignment:
To preview an input file page before adding to a run list, use your
Adobe Acrobat software to open the file from its folder location.
To preview a run-list page in the Pages view, select a page in the
Pages List.
To preview a content page in the Press Runs view, select the press
run, sheet, web, or side that contains the section in the Press Runs
List.

Run-list pages
A run list organizes a product's pages in front-to-back sequence, so that the
pages will flow correctly through the template pages in a layout. To help you plan
the distribution of pages on the press runs, you can provide detailed information
and notes about each run-list page.

Setting up a product run list

As you set up a product run list, you can add information about each page to help
ensure that all the pages are correctly placed in the run list and on a press run.
Notes:
Depending on the job, you might set up a product run list either before or
after preparing the press-run layouts.
For multiple-product imposition jobs, you can set up a run list for each
product.
For gang-only jobs, you do not set up a run list. Instead, you add file pages
directly to a press run.

1. Go to the Pages view.

2. On the Pages List toolbar, set the View by option to Product.
3. Choose a method:

Add an Click and drag the file (or file placeholder) from the Files
entire file: list, or directly from a folder location onto the product
name in the Pages List.

35
 Add an Click and drag the page from the Files list onto the
individual product name, to a specific run-list position, or onto a
PDF page page to replace it. Press Shift, then click and drag to select
or and add multiple pages.
placeholder
page:

Add empty Use the Add Pages icon in the Pages List toolbar. Double-
placeholder click or drag the icon, and in the dialog box that appears,
pages: select the product, name the placeholder, and specify the
page count and position in the list.

To add blank pages, use the Add Blank Pages icon:

Insert a Drag the icon to a specific run-list position, or drag it onto

single blank a page to replace the page.
page:

Add a Press and hold Option/Alt as you drag the icon, specify
specific the page count in a pop-up dialog box, and drop the pages
number of at an insertion point.
blank
pages:

Add Double-click the icon, and in the dialog box that appears,
multiple select the product, and specify the page count and
blank pages position in the list.
at a specific
location:

The run-list position numbers are updated according to where you placed
the new pages.

Inserting Renumbers the run-list page positions in sequence from the

between insertion point. If you previously applied folios, they are
page retained, and you will need to apply folios to the new pages.
positions

Replacing Retains the numbering of the page or pages in the selected

page position.
positions Note: If you drag multiple pages onto a single existing page
position, then the additional new pages replace the
corresponding number of following page positions, and new
page positions are added if needed.

4. Adjust the Pages List to ensure that the run-list pages are in reader
sequence.

36
 4.

To rearrange Drag the page rows as needed.

the pages:

To remove Select the pages and click Delete. This does not affect
pages: the Files list.

To cut or Select the page, select Edit > Cut or Copy, click the page
copy and that should be after the pasted run-list pages, and select
paste a page: Edit > Paste.

5. Edit the settings in each row, as needed.

You can assign folios, edit the placeholder names and planned colors, and
write notes.
6. If the product contains parts, select Part in the View by area of the toolbar,
and drag pages as needed to organize them into part-page positions.

Working with placeholders

Create multi-page file placeholders or individual placeholder pages, and replace
them as content becomes available, or keep the placeholders to print output for
unpopulated workflows.
Use placeholders when customer input files are not yet available, or if content will
be added by a workflow system downstream.
Choose a task:

Add a file
1. Select Job > Add File Placeholder.
placeholder
to the Files 2. Specify the page trim size and number of pages, and
list provide an optional name.
3. Click OK to add the file placeholder and its placeholder
pages to the file list.
4. Add the placeholder pages to the job's press sheet
layouts.

The file and its pages appear in green text to indicate that they
are placeholders that can be replaced with content files when
available.

Replace a
1. In the Files list, select the placeholder file.
file
placeholder 2. Select Job > Add File Placeholder.
3. If the page count of the placeholder file and the actual
content file are different, your response to the message
that appears depends on whether you still need to fill the
exact number of pages that were in the placeholder file.

37
 The file name is updated.
Any new content pages automatically replace any
corresponding placeholder pages that were already
placed.
If the page count was different, the file list is adjusted. For
example, if the replacement file contained fewer pages
than the placeholder, a new placeholder file might appear
for the pages that were not yet replaced by new content
pages.

Add
1. Double-click the Add Pages tool in the Pages List toolbar.
placeholder
pages to a 2. In the Add Pages dialog box, select the product, give the
run list new file placeholder a name, and specify the page count
and position information.

The placeholder pages are inserted into the run list, and the
placeholder file appears in green text in the Files list.

Replace a Drag a PDF page or the Blank Page icon onto the placeholder
placeholder page in the run list or on a press-run layout.
page

Replace a
1. In the Files list, select the file placeholder.
file
placeholder 2. Select Job > Replace File Placeholder Job, and locate and
open the file.
If the page counts are different, a message prompts you to
resolve the difference.

The new file replaces the placeholder file in the Files list, and new
content pages replace the corresponding placeholder pages. If
the page count was different, the Files list is adjusted according
to your response to the message.

Pages view reference

In the Pages view, set up the product run lists with blank, placeholder, or PDF
content pages; preview individual pages and page details; adjust the trim boxes;
and reposition, scale, or rotate the PDF content.

Pages workspace
Use the workspace in the Pages view to check the alignment of the content within
the trim box. You can reposition the content by dragging the page, or fine-tune
the positioning by directly editing the dimension text boxes.

38
Select a page in the Pages List to display it in the workspace. Selecting a page also
displays its settings in the Properties pane. To quickly select all pages, all odd or
even pages, or a range of pages in the Pages List, right-click a product or part, and
select an option.
Tip: To control which details are displayed in the workspace, use the View menu
and workspace toolbar.

Page trims
You can view the following trims:
Trim box: Dark blue rectangle that initially represents the PDF file or the
default page size for a placeholder page. After the run-list page is placed
on a press run, the trim box is derived from the template page.
Bleed box: Red rectangle that is relative to the trim box
Page size: Green lines that show a PDF page relative to the trim box,
adjusted when you reposition, rotate, or scale the PDF run-list page
Planned page size box: Pink rectangle that appears only if specified for an
assembly's product intent
Select
For pages that are already assigned to a layout, use this tool to select and drag
the trim guides to reposition the content within the trim box.
Rotate

Rotates the content of the previewed page in 90-degree increments without

changing the template-page orientation
Pan

Moves your view of the workspace

Zoom

Click the object or general area that you want to inspect more closely, or
drag a marquee around a specific area.
Show Page Previews

Display a preview of all page content..

Show Dimensions
Displays the page dimensions, including any distances between the
template-page trim box and the PDF content trim box. You must select View >
Show Trim Box to use this option.
Page preview navigators

39
 Select a page in the Pages List to display, and then use the
arrow keys to scroll through the other pages in the current list.
The text box displays the run-list number of the currently previewed page,
followed by the total number of pages in the current list.
To jump to a specific page within the current list, type its run-list number in the
box.

View menu in the Pages view

The View menu lets you control the details that you see in the workspace.
You can toggle these menu items between showing and hiding the specified
items.

Show Dimensions
Displays the layout dimensions, including distances between section or ganged
page edges or centers (depending on Preferences). Dimension text boxes
become editable when you click a page or section.

Show Page Previews

Displays a preview of all page content

Show Page Sizes

Displays the page width and height dimensions

Show Trim Boxes

Displays a dark blue box that indicates the page trim size

Show Bleed Boxes

Displays a red box that shows the page bleed margins

Show File Page Numbers

Displays the input file's page number on each page

Show File Names

Displays the input file name on each page. If Show File Page Numbers is also
selected, the page number is added to the file name.

Show Folio
Displays the folio that you assigned in the Pages List

40
Pages List
Manage the product run-list pages in the Pages List in the Pages view, and
immediately preview a page that you select in the list.
Note: For gang-only jobs, you add the PDF file pages to the Files list and then
work directly in the Press Runs view. You do not set up a Pages List.

Toolbar

Add Pages
Double-click or drag the icon, and in the dialog box that appears, select the
product, name the placeholder, and specify the page count and position in the list.
The new placeholder file and file pages also appear in the Files list.

Add Blank Pages

To insert a single blank page: Drag the icon to a specific run-list position, or
drag it onto a page to replace the page.
To drag a specific number of blank pages: Press and hold Option/Alt as you drag
the icon, specify the page count in a pop-up dialog box, and drop the pages at an
insertion point.
To add multiple blank pages at a specific location: Double-click the icon, and in
the dialog box that appears, select the product, and specify the page count and
position in the list.

Folio list
Lists the standard folio sets that are provided with the software and any common
folio resources that you add.
Note: These folios are for reference only. Page lists can be ordered only by
product or page numbers.
Select a folio set to auto-apply to the page list, based on the binding style, or
select User-defined to edit the page folios directly in the list.
To ignore the binding style and apply sequential numbers from front to back,
select 1, 2, 3...

Increment
Sequentially increments and applies the alphanumeric or roman numeric folio
of the currently selected page to the remaining page rows in the list. You can use
this tool in the Folio column.

Repeat
Copies the selected cell text into the remaining page rows. You can use this
tool in the Folio, Planned Colors, and Notes columns.

41
C, M, Y, K Throughout

Sets the Planned Color of the page list to CMYK. You can also edit this value
for individual pages.

Black Throughout

Sets the Planned Color of the page list to black. You can also edit this value
for individual pages.

View by
Product: For each product, lists all of its pages in Run List order, from the
front to the back of the product. The Part Page column shows the part
page numbers that occupy each run-list position.
Part: For each product, lists the pages per part in Part Page order, in
collapsible tree lists. The Run List column shows the run-list positions that
each part page occupies.

List columns
Tip: Drag the column edges to adjust their widths. Drag the column headers to
rearrange the columns.

Part Page
Displays the page numbers according to their position within a part, and indicates
whether each page is assigned to a press run. The presentation of this list
depends on your current View by selection:
By Part: Part Page is the first column and provides a collapsible tree view
of product names, part names, and the pages, numbered according to
their position in the part.
By Product: Run List is the first column, and each page number is
described by its part name.

Folio
Double-click this cell and select a common folio resource from the list, or double-
click and edit the value. You can use the Increment or Repeat tools to apply your
folio to the remaining pages in the list.
Note: If you insert new pages between pages with incremented folios, reapply the
selected folio set or manually edit the folios to reflect the correct sequence.

Run List
Defines the reader sequence of the pages in one product, from front to back. You
cannot edit the auto-assigned run-list numbers. When you view the Pages List by
product, the Run List column is the first column.

42
File Name
Displays the editable placeholder name or the non-editable PDF file name of the
content page. For placeholder pages, you can double-click and edit the value.

Planned Colors
Double-click this cell and select a common color resource from the list, or type a
descriptor to serve as a placeholder for the actual expected color. When the
actual color is updated, you can check for discrepancies and resolve or ignore
them, as needed.
The list includes the standard CMYK process colors, standard coatings, your pre-
defined common color resources, and any custom colors that are used in this job.
You can use the Repeat tool to apply your color selection to the remaining pages
in the list.
Press Shift and click to select multiple items from the list, and use a comma to
separate multiple values.

Actual Colors
Displays the actual colors that are provided by the input file, which are updated
whenever a color is mapped to another color separation in the Press Runs view

Notes
Type or view a note.

Run list page properties

Select a page in the Pages List to display its trim boxes and content in the
workspace, and its settings in the Properties pane. To quickly select all pages, all
odd or even pages, or a range of pages in the Pages List, right-click a product or
part, and select an option.

Part Name
Displays the part to which this page is assigned

Run List Position

Displays the sequential position of the page within the product, derived from the
Run List column in the Pages List

File Name
Displays the editable file placeholder name or the non-editable PDF file name

Page Size, W, H
Depends on the current state of the page that occupies this run-list position:
43
 If the page is not yet placed on a press-run layout: Displays the
dimensions of the PDF page or placeholder page. If a PDF input file does
not specify the trim box size, the bleed box or media box size is used.
If the page is placed on a press-run layout: Displays the Finished Page Size
that is defined in the Template Page properties.

Folio
Displays the current value of the Folio column in the Pages List. Your edits are
updated in both locations.

Planned Colors
Select a common color resource from the list, or type a descriptor to serve as a
placeholder for the expected actual color.

Actual Colors
Displays the actual colors that are provided by the input file, which are updated
whenever a color is mapped to another color separation in the Press Runs view

Content Page section

Position
Edit the content position in selected pages when you need to override the Page
Position Adjustment values that are specified for the product's even and odd
pages (Job > Layout Details), or the Autocenter run list pages default setting on
the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Center in template page
Use trim offsets
You can specify the width and height distances between the lower-left
corner of the content page and the lower-left corner of the template page,
or drag the page in the Pages workspace to update these values.
Note: The lower-left corner of a content page is defined in terms of the
trim box or bleed box, depending on how the page size is defined in the
input file.

Scaling
Scaling is based on the trim box or bleed box, depending on how the page size is
defined in the input file.
None: Applies no scaling (default)
Scale the content to fit template page: The results depend on the
Constrain proportions setting:

44
 If proportions are constrained: Scales the height and width of the
content page to the best possible fit within the template page,
while also ensuring that the new proportions of the content page
match its original dimensions.

If proportions are not constrained: Automatically scales the height

and width by separate factors as needed for the best possible fit to
completely fill the template page, with no extra space.
Set Scaling: Specify scaling percentages or new page dimensions for the
width and height.
If proportions are constrained: Typing one value automatically sets
the other value proportionately.
If proportions are not constrained: You can specify separate values
for the width and height.
Select Constrain proportions to retain the original proportions of the
content page, or clear it if you need to change the proportions
anamorphically.
Note: If you do not constrain proportions, skewed images can result.

Page Rotation
You can rotate a content page within the template page in 90-degree increments.
The content rotates around the page center, independent of the template page.

Comments
Type a note that you or other operators can review and edit.

Pages on press runs

Every content page on a press-run layout has a corresponding template page that
defines the placement of its content on the sheet and within the final trim box.
You control the details to preview, and you can edit page properties directly in
the layout or the Properties pane.

Adding content pages directly to a layout

For ganged jobs, you can place pages directly on a press-run layout without first
setting up a run list in the Pages view.

1. Select the pages using any of these methods:

In the Files list, select a PDF file or file placeholder.
Note: If the content files are not yet available, select Job > Add File
Placeholder to add the required number of placeholder pages to the
Files list.
In the Files list, expand a multi-page file to view its list of pages.
Select a single page, or press Shift+click to select multiple pages.

45
 Select a PDF file from an accessible folder in the file directory.
2. For press runs that already contain a layout resource, drag the selected file,
page, or pages onto a template page.
The first page is assigned to the template page position, and any additional
new content pages flow through the available template pages in sequence.
Note: Any existing content on the affected template pages is replaced.
3. For manual ganging, drag the selected pages to a position on the press
sheet.
If you drag the pages to an empty area, the pages cascade onto the
sheet, and you can arrange them.
If you drag a page to a position near an existing page on the sheet,
it snaps into the default snap position that is defined in the
Preferences dialog box.
If you drag the selected pages onto a template page, the first page
is assigned to the template page position, and any additional new
content pages flow through the available template pages in
sequence.
Note: Any existing content on the affected template pages is
replaced.
4. To place any remaining content pages, you can either duplicate the press
run, or insert a new sheet via the Jobs menu, and repeat the steps as
needed.
5. In the Pages view, check the run list that was generated.

The Count column in the Files list is updated with the number of instances of
each page on a press run. A value of 0 (zero) appears beside any page that is not
yet assigned to a press run.

Adjusting the layout details for a product

Use this method to set page positioning and shingling values for an entire
product.

Requirements:
The job must be open.

1. Select Job > Layout Details, or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL/CMD + I.
2. If page offsets are required, select the product in the Page Position
Adjustment area.
3. In the Page Position Adjustment area, type Horizontal and Vertical offset
amounts for all the Odd pages and Even pages.
Note: This overrides the Autocenter run list pages setting on the General
tab of the Preferences dialog box. You can override these values for
selected content pages.

4. 46
 4. If shingling is required, select the product in the Shingling (Creep) area,
and set the values as needed.
For details, see the related topic about shingling the page images.
Note: You can override these values for selected template pages.

Managing pages on press-run layouts

Access the template and content page properties for fine-tuning the pages on
press runs, and replace placeholders with content pages as they become
available.
Choose a task:

Access In the workspace, select the page or pages:

page
Use the Select tool to select an independent or ganged
properties
page, or all the pages in an imposition.
For imposition pages, use the Page Select tool.
For pages within a ganged page group, use the Ungroup
tool before selecting.
Make your edits in the Properties pane on the Content Page and
Template Page tabs.

Replace a Drag the new content page to the target page position, and
content or release the mouse when the recycle symbol appears. All same-
placeholder numbered template pages are updated with the new content.
page To replace one content page without updating all the other same-
numbered pages, press Option/Alt and drag.

Move a Select and drag the page, and release the mouse when guidelines
ganged indicate a suitable position. To fine-tune its position, edit its
page gutter and/or margin text boxes.
In the workspace, use the Select tool to:
Move a page
Select an ungrouped ganged page or a page group.
Press and hold Shift while clicking multiple pages.
To select pages within a ganged page group, use the
Ungroup tool before selecting

Shingling the page images for creep compensation

Creep in a book can cause content to be trimmed due to pages pushing out when
the sections are folded. You compensate for creep by progressively shingling the
page image areas towards the binding to decrease the page gutter or margin
width, without affecting content. If you must maintain the gutter and margin
widths, you can choose to progressively scale the images instead of shifting them.

47
The amount of creep in a book is affected by the number of folds and by paper
thickness, and the affected pages depends on the binding style:

In saddle-stitched books, the increased thickness at the fold can cause the
inside section to push out.
In perfect-bound books, creep is limited to the inner pages in each
individual section.

Bottling
To additionally compensate for page skew that might be due to the number of
pages, the thickness of the paper, or the folding equipment, you can apply Page
Rotation (Bottling) in the template page properties. You can also override a
product's shingling settings for specific template pages.

1. Configure the related settings on the Output tab in the Preferences dialog
box as needed:

Scale shingled pages Choose the default scaling type:

Proportionally: Retains the vertical and

horizontal aspect ratio

Anamorphically (Horizontally):
Changes the vertical and horizontal
ratios

Shingle crop marks Shifts the crop marks along with pages
that are shingled for creep

Remove crop marks when  

exceeding the center of gutters

2. Determine the amount of shingling to apply, using either the approximate

formula or exact method.
Tip: The value of stock thickness is measured in microns. Use a
micrometer, or obtain the thickness from the paper supplier

Approximate (number of sheets/4) x stock thickness The value that you

formula use for the number of sheets depends on the binding
type. If perfect bound, it is the pages per section. If
saddle-stitched, it is pages per product or part.

48
 Exact a. Using the same kind of paper and the same folding
method equipment that you plan to use for the job, make a
folding dummy.
b. Use a precise instrument to measure the amount
of creep.
c. Measure the difference between the outer edge
(face) of the outermost page and the outer edge
of the innermost page. This is the total creep
compensation amount that is needed, which you
can apply to either the innermost or outermost
pages or divide between the inner and outer
pages.

3. To apply your calculations, select Job > Layout Details.

4. In the Shingling (Creep) area, select the product that requires adjustment.
5. Optional: Select the Scale check box to preserve the margins and
progressively scale the images.
6. In the Inner and Outer boxes, specify the distance and direction to move
the innermost and outermost page edges.
If Scaling is not selected, positive values move the image area
toward the binding edge of the page, and negative values move the
image area away from the binding edge.
If Scaling is selected, positive values reduce the image area, and
negative values increase the image area, based on the Preferences
settings.
For a perfect-bound or come-and-go product or part, the Inner
amount shifts or scales the innermost pages of each section. The
specified amounts are applied to the largest sections, and shingling
on any smaller sections is scaled back so that all sections match
each other after binding
For a saddle-stitched product or part, the Inner amount shifts or
scales the innermost pages.
7. To override the shingling for specific pages, edit the template page
properties.
For example, to prevent image distortion in crossover text or images that
spread across adjacent pages, you can apply zero shingling and zero-bleed
margins.

Bleed margins for sections with bottling

Bleed margins for bottled pages are restricted to the original position of the page
bleed margins, so that the bleeds do not overlap with adjacent pages.

49
 In this example:

The dashed lines represent the original position of the page bleed margins.
The solid lines represent the position of the bottled pages.
The solid double lines indicate where the bleeds are retained.

Press Runs view reference for pages

Use the Press Runs view to manage the placement of pages on the layouts.

View menu in the Press Runs view

The View menu lets you control the details that you see in the workspace.
You can toggle these menu items between showing and hiding the specified
items.

Show Dimensions
Displays the layout dimensions, including distances between page edges or
centers (depending on settings in the Preferences dialog box) and between
adjacent pages and press sheet edges. Select a layout element to edit its text
boxes.

Show Page Previews

Displays a preview of all page content

Show Page Sizes

Displays the width and height of the selected page, page group, mark, stock, or
media

Show Trim Boxes

Displays a dark blue box that indicates the page trim size

Show Bleed Boxes

Displays a red box that shows the page bleed margins

Show File Page Numbers

Displays the input file's page number on each page
50
Show File Names
Displays the input file name on each page. If Show File Page Numbers is also
selected, the page number is added to the file name.

Show Template Page Numbers

Displays the page numbers at the center of each page

Show Marks, Show Pages

Displays or hides the pages or marks. For example, turning off the display of
pages makes it easier to check or select marks.

Show Tiles
Displays the tiles and tile marks, if applicable

Show Group Count

Displays the number of pages in each ganged or step-and-repeat page group

Show Folio
Displays the folio that you assigned in the Pages List

Content page properties

In the workspace, select a page, and in the Properties pane, select the Content
Page tab to display its settings. The customer's original files are not affected by
any changes that you make to the page in the layout, and any rotation or scaling
that you apply affects only the selected page.

File Name
Displays the full path and name of the customer input file

Page Number
Displays the sequentially assigned number, derived from the input file in the Files
list

Page Size, W, H
Displays the dimensions of the PDF page or placeholder page. If a PDF input file
does not specify the trim box size, the bleed box or media box size is used.

51
Position
Edit the content position in selected pages when you need to override the Page
Position Adjustment values that are specified for the product's even and odd
pages (Job > Layout Details), or the Autocenter run list pages default setting on
the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Center in template page
Use trim offsets
You can specify the width and height distances between the lower-left
corner of the content page and the lower-left corner of the template page,
or drag the page in the Pages workspace to update these values.
Note: The lower-left corner of a content page is defined in terms of the
trim box or bleed box, depending on how the page size is defined in the
input file.

Scaling
Scaling is based on the trim box or bleed box, depending on how the page size is
defined in the input file.
None: Applies no scaling (default)
Scale the content to fit template page: The results depend on the
Constrain proportions setting:
If proportions are constrained: Scales the height and width of the
content page to the best possible fit within the template page,
while also ensuring that the new proportions of the content page
match its original dimensions.
If proportions are not constrained: Automatically scales the height
and width by separate factors as needed for the best possible fit to
completely fill the template page, with no extra space.
Set Scaling: Specify scaling percentages or new page dimensions for the
width and height.
If proportions are constrained: Typing one value automatically sets
the other value proportionately.
If proportions are not constrained: You can specify separate values
for the width and height.
Select Constrain proportions to retain the original proportions of the
content page, or clear it if you need to change the proportions
anamorphically.
Note: If you do not constrain proportions, skewed images can result.

Page Rotation
You can rotate a content page within the template page in 90-degree increments.
The content rotates around the page center, independent of the template page.

52
Template page properties (common)
In the Press Runs workspace, select a page, and in the Properties pane, select the
Template Page tab to display its settings. Template pages define the positioning
of content pages on press-run layouts.

Page Number, Section

The front and back page numbers and the section numbers determine the flow of
the run-list pages.
When you duplicate or copy ganged or independent pages, the template page
numbers are retained. However, if you duplicate an entire press run that contains
a layout, the page numbers increment sequentially in the new press run.

Finished Page Size, W, H

The final width and height of the printed and trimmed product page. The default
dimensions are defined on the General tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Reference Point
The corresponding corner or center point on both the sheet and the page, from
which Position on Sheet offsets are measured.
This point remains constant when rotation is applied.

Position on Sheet, H, V
The horizontal and vertical offset distances between the reference point and the
lower-left page corner

Locked
Imposition pages are always locked into their Position on Sheet and Reference
Point, which is always the lower-left corner. Rotation can be applied, because it
does not change the reference point.

Page Orientation
The head direction of the template page, which can be up, right, down, or left

Content Bleed Limits

The maximum bleed to allow on each page edge. By default, all four edges use the
default bleed limit.
To be able to edit the values, use the check boxes:
Select the Use default check box to apply the default limit that is defined
on the General tab in the Preferences dialog box.
Select the Use symmetrical margins check box to apply the Top width to
all four edges.
Clear the Use symmetrical margins check box to activate all the text
boxes, and then specify the individual widths.
53
Page Bottling (Rotation) and Shingling (Creep)
When an imposition section is folded, its pages might bottle (also known as skew
) due to the number of pages, the thickness of the paper, or the folding
equipment. You might also need to set or disable shingling for specific pages in a
book.
In the Press Runs workspace, select a page, and in the Properties pane, select the
Template Page tab to display its settings. Template pages define the positioning
of content pages on press-run layouts.

Page Bottling (Rotation)

To compensate for bottling, you rotate the pages in the opposite direction. You
specify a positive or negative degree of bottling.

A positive amount rotates the pages counterclockwise relative to the head

direction on the press sheet front.
A negative amount rotates the pages clockwise on the press sheet front.
The back side pages automatically rotate to line up with the front side
pages.
Specify the Degrees and the point Around which to rotate the pages.

Top right corner

Top left corner

Lower left corner Lower right corner

54
 Arbitrary point Center

Note: If you select Arbitrary Point, also specify the X and Y coordinates of the
point.

Stock-based progressive bottling

Use this option with the stock's thickness value. You can define rules that auto-
calculate the bottling of a Preps job.
Progressive bottling is based on the number of pages in a signature (unlike the
vertical shingling option that is based on the total number of pages in a part).
You can enable or disable a rule based on the Binding Style (Flat Work, Perfect
Bound, or Saddle-Stitched), direction of bottling (Inner, Outer, or Both), page
count (based on the number of pages in a signature), and ratio (ratio is
represented as the maximum rotation allowed).
For example, in a Preps job that is Saddle-Stitched, you can set the direction to
inner, for a page count ? 32 ratio = 5.
When you use this stock in a Preps job that is saddle-stitched with a page count
of 64, the software will automatically calculate the bottling value with a
maximum of 5 degrees.
The rule programs how to apply an auto-calculated solution, however, you still
need to select Auto Bottling from the Job menu > Layout Details dialog box.
In addition, you can continue to use the traditional bottling method. Select
Custom Bottling from the Job menu > Layout Details dialog box. You have access
to all the individual page controls through the Template Page properties.
In Preps 7.1 and later, this option works both with Preps jobs that use a JDF fold
pattern and with jobs that use a custom fold pattern.

Shingling (Creep)
Use these settings to override a book's creep compensation, such as when
images spread across adjacent pages.

Shift Page Content

Select the direction for shifting the image area to override the default setting that
is derived from the product.

Amount
Automatic: Applies the Shingling (Creep) compensation that this product
currently uses.

55
 Custom: Overrides the product's Shingling (Creep) compensation by your
specified amount.

Vertical Shingling (Creep)

Use this option to control vertical shingling from the Layout Details window.
Vertical shingling, along with a number of factors, page count, paper thickness,
and binding style lets you move the pages up or down with respect to the binding
edge.
When you enter a positive or a negative value in the Inner or Outer box, the
pages will move in relation to the same axis as the binding edge. This movement
is done over the course of each 2x2, 8-page sequence (head-to-head or foot-to-
foot).
This option only works with Preps jobs that use a JDF fold pattern. Custom
defined fold patterns are not supported.

Common resources for planning pages

Use common resources to provide information about pages to help you organize
a product's run list, its part page lists, and the distribution of pages on the press-
run layouts.

Managing the common colors

Customize the planned colors that you can assign to pages by adding your own
color names to the common colors that the software provides.

1. Select Resources > Common Colors.

2. Choose a task:
Click [+] and type the new color name.
Select an existing color, click Edit, and type a new name for the
color.
To delete a color, select the color and click Delete.

The revised list is immediately available in all Planned Color lists. The software
stores the list details in a commonColors.xml file in the Resources folder.

Managing the common folios

Customize the folios that you can assign to run-list pages by adding your own
folios or customizing the standard folio sets that the software provides.

1. Select Resources > Common Folios.

2. Choose a task:
Click [+] and type the new folio name.
Select an existing folio, click Edit, and type a new name for the folio.

56
 2.

To delete a folio, select the folio and click Delete.

The revised list is immediately available in the Folio column of the Pages List. The
software stores the list details in a commonFolios.xml file in the Resources
folder.

Standard page size conversion

These tables provide horizontal and vertical scaling percentages required to
convert common page sizes to other standard sizes.
Tabloid ANSI B (11 x 17 in.; 279 x 432 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Legal 77 82

Letter 77 65

Half-letter 50 50

ISO A3 106 97

ISO B4 90 82

ISO A4 75 69

ISO B5 63 58

ISO A5 53 49

Legal ANSI B (8.5 x 14.0 in.; 216 x 356 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 129 121

Legal — —

Letter 100 78

Half-letter 65 61

ISO A3 138 118

ISO B4 116 99

57
 ISO A4 97 83

ISO B5 81 70

ISO A5 69 59

Letter ANSI A (8.5 x 11.0 in.; 216 x 279 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 129 155

Legal 100 128

Half-letter 65 77

ISO A3 138 151

ISO B4 116 127

ISO A4 97 106

ISO B5 81 90

ISO A5 69 75

Half Letter (5.5 x 8.5 in.; 140 x 216 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 199 200

Legal 154 165

Letter 154 129

ISO A3 212 194

ISO B4 179 163

ISO A4 150 138

ISO B5 126 116

58
 ISO A5 106 97

ISO A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.; 297 x 420 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 94 103

Legal 73 85

Letter 73 66

Half-letter 47 51

ISO B4 84 84

ISO A4 71 71

ISO B5 59 60

ISO A5 50 50

ISO B4 (9.8 x 13.9 in.; 250 x 353 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 112 122

Legal 86 101

Letter 86 79

Half-letter 56 61

ISO A3 119 119

ISO A4 84 84

ISO B5 70 71

ISO A5 59 59

ISO A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.; 210 x 297 mm)

Convert to: H% V%
59
 Tabloid 133 145

Legal 103 120

Letter 103 94

Half-letter 67 73

ISO A3 141 141

ISO B4 119 119

ISO B5 84 84

ISO A5 70 71

ISO B5 (6.9 x 9.8 in.; 176 x 250 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 159 173

Legal 123 142

Letter 123 112

Half-letter 80 86

ISO A3 169 168

ISO B4 142 141

ISO A4 119 119

ISO A5 84 84

ISO A5 (5.8 x 8.3 in.; 148 x 210 mm)

Convert to: H% V%

Tabloid 189 206

Legal 146 170

60
 Letter 146 133

Half-letter 95 103

ISO A3 201 200

ISO B4 169 168

ISO A4 142 141

ISO B5 119 119

4
61
4 Press runs

The way that you use the views to create, edit, and preview press runs can be
affected by such factors as job types, product requirements and complexity, the
number of people who work on the jobs, the feature set supported by your
software license, and personal preferences. Here are a few possibilities:
You might first use the Pages view to collect the input files or define file
placeholders and set up the run list, and then switch to the Press Runs
view to build the press-run layouts.
For ganged jobs or for basic single-product, single-part jobs, you might
work entirely in the Press Runs view to create and interactively edit and
preview any number of sheetfed and multiweb press runs to
accommodate the job's pages and manage the stock, media, marks, and
layout for each sheet or web.
For intelligent setup of ganged press runs, you might use the AutoGang
feature in the Press Runs view.
Jobs for complex publications might be done in stages. For example, a
planner, customer service representative, or senior prepress operator
might start a job by providing the product intent in the Assembly view.
The job can then be completed by a prepress operator who creates the
layouts and prints the press runs.
In a JDF-based workflow, you use the Assembly view to provide any
information that was not received via JDF, and then check the auto-
generated press-run layouts in the Press Runs view.

Flexible tools for creating layouts

You might use the same tools for most jobs, or you might switch between several
methods to match the variations in jobs. Tools include stock and media
resources, layout resources and searches, manual and automated ganging,
product intent and assembly planning, and JDF automation.

Press-run Useful for:

creation
tool

Stock and Manually targeting a specific sheet and device, including last-
Media lists minute changes that do not affect the layouts and pages.

Layouts Quickly finding a suitable layout within a large collection of

Search templates or fold patterns, based on various search criteria,
including page count, binding style, and name.

62
Press-run Useful for:
creation
tool

Templates Repeating the same layouts for multiple products and jobs that
list require specific page and sheet sizes, binding styles, and page
numbering.

AutoSelect Generating press runs for a single-part product's run list whose
page count can be efficiently imposed using a standard binding
style.

Fold Building layouts on the fly for products and product sections that
Patterns vary in page count, page size, stock, media, and binding style;
list also for flexibility in orienting a section to match the folds to the
stock grain, or for customized content transformations for
different binding edges.
Fold patterns quickly create press-run sections with pre-
numbered page grids. The default or planned sheet and page size
are automatically applied, and you can change these properties
on the fly, or rotate or flip the grid on the press sheet.

Manual Placing ganged flat-work pages with full drag-and-drop control;

ganging stepping and repeating ganged pages and page groups on press
runs.

AutoGang Saving time by allowing the software to gang multiple products in

flatwork-only jobs, based on your settings and priorities.

AutoGang Fully automated ganging in a Prinergy workflow.

hot folders

Create Using a dialog box for creating an imposition section that is

Imposition based on fixed gutters or on a fold pattern, for use in the current
dialog box job and/or to save as a template.

Product Starting a new multi-part product by copying all the known

Intent requirements into a single dialog box, perhaps by copying from a
dialog box printed job ticket. If enough detail is provided, you can proceed
directly to autogenerating or manually completing the press runs.

Assembly Revising, refining, or completing the product intent details for

view jobs with multiple products, parts, and binding styles before
autogenerating or manually completing the press runs.

JDF
automation

63
 Press-run Useful for:
creation
tool

Deriving the product intent from a JDF file, which can support
auto signature creation (ASC), auto signature matching (ASM),
or both.

Section terminology
A section is a container for an imposition grid of pages that will be in the correct
sequence when folded and bound. However, the actual definition can depend on
whether you are discussing a planned product component in the Assembly view
or a production component in the Press Runs view.

Press-run sections
A section on a layout is referred to as a press-run section. (This is also known as a
book signature, or in JDF, as a BinderySignature.)
You can manually create a press-run section by adding a template signature or
fold pattern to a layout, or creating an imposition for a layout.
After a press sheet is printed and cut, each section is folded and trimmed, and
arrives at the finishing equipment as one folded signature.

Product sections
When setting up a book structure in the Assembly view or in the Products list,
you organize its text part into sequentially numbered product sections. A product
section represents a specific planned page range within a product assembly,
which can be imposed or ganged with other product sections on a press run
You can also create press-run sections by autogenerating the press runs from
product intent, or by dragging product sections from the Products list.

Multiple sections
Each section on a press-run layout represents one instance of a product section,
depending on how you plan your press runs. There are many ways to create a
press run with multiple sections, including these examples:
Renumbering a fold pattern or an imposition on a layout so that it contains
two low-folio pages (that is, both are page 1) breaks it into two press-run
sections.
Ganging a product section by dragging it twice to the same press run
results in two identical signatures for two copies of the same product.
You can also gang product sections from different products to create a
multisection press run.

64
Sub-sections (Ribbons)
The concept behind sub-sections (or ribbons) is to allow bindery operations to be
accomplished as part of the press running. As the paper flows through the press,
the sheet (or ribbon) is cut and then transferred to the top of the next sheet (or
ribbon). Then the inline finishing processes cut and fold this to produce a finished
result.
There are two ways to create a press run that has Sub-sections (or ribbons):
Create a multi-web layout and then copy and paste the web section onto
web 1, thus combining them into sub-sections or ribbons. Then, select the
extra webs and delete them.
Create a multi-web layout, save it as a custom fold pattern, and then
generate a web press run with the custom fold pattern. Copy and paste
the web sections onto web 1, thus combining them into sub-sections or
ribbons. The generation process will fill the sheet with ribbons. Delete the
extra ribbons from web 1, and then select the extra webs and delete them.

Resources for press runs

When building a press run, use the lists of predefined resources to select and add
the media, stock, marks, and layouts. The software ships with sample resources,
and you can configure additional resources for the lists.

About the lists in the Resources pane

Set up resource lists with your commonly used media, stock, marks, and layouts
for building press runs. You can manually drag the resources to a layout, or use
various tools for generating the layouts.
The Resources pane provides the following lists:
The Stocks list contains the available sheet sizes. Each stock resource
represents a press sheet that will be printed on one or both sides to
produce the final printed product. When adding a stock, you specify its
dimensions and characteristics for your own reference—such as
manufacturer, weight, and grain direction.
The Preps 7 and later software versions include a Variable Sheet
Size property that lets you define a signature for a fold pattern with
an unconstrained height and width. As you change the fold pattern
or add additional sections to a variable sheet size, the sheet will be
updated to accommodate the change. You can define this stock
property in the Preps job or template. To change from a variable
sheet size in the Resources pane, right-click on another stock, and
select Replace on Current, Replace All Variable Sheets, Replace on
Selected Press Runs, or Replace All Press Runs.
The Media list contains the software's pre-defined standard media and
the media resources that you configure to target specific devices. You can
also store tile sets for specific media resources.

65
 The Marks list contains the predefined marks and the mark files that you
create, which are based on Kodak SmartMarks technology.

The Layouts pane contains a Templates list, a Fold Patterns list, a Step &
Repeat Patterns list, and a Search tool for filtering the lists.
The Templates list contains complete, reusable layouts that
predefine the press sheet dimensions and template page sizes,
positions, and numbering for specific binding styles.
Preps includes a selection of sample templates, and you can save
frequently repeated jobs as templates. When setting up Preps, you
might create non-customer jobs with layouts for the purpose of
creating templates.
Note: You can also migrate and continue to use existing templates
from previous versions of the software.
The Fold Patterns list contains dimensionless, prenumbered page
grids that you drag to press runs to build imposition layouts on the
fly. You can edit the default binding style, page size, page numbers,
and trims that are automatically applied to the resulting press-run
section.
The software includes standard fold patterns that are derived from
the CIP4 Pagination Catalog (also referred to as the JDF Fold Catalog
). You can also create and save new fold patterns or variations of
standard fold patterns.
The Step & Repeat Patterns list shows previously saved step-and-
repeat placeholders created in Preps 7.x that contain a specific grid
pattern of a set height and width.
Use the Layouts Search tool to find a specific layout in large
collections of templates and fold patterns.

Fold patterns
Fold patterns quickly create press-run sections with pre-numbered page grids.
The default or planned sheet and page size are automatically applied, and you
can change these properties on the fly, or rotate or flip the grid on the press
sheet.
A fold pattern describes the sequence of folds that the folding machine will apply.
A standard set of fold patterns is included in the software, and you can create and
store custom fold patterns. Although you cannot change the standard JDF fold
patterns, you can save them under different names to suit your operations.
Each reusable fold pattern resource defines an imposition section's lay direction
on the press sheet. By default, the lower-left corner is the reference point. You
can flip the fold pattern to place the section's lay corner on the opposite side of
the press sheet. You can also rotate the fold pattern before or after adding it to a
press run, and define trims as needed for production.
Fold patterns provide dynamic flexibility in creating jobs:

66
 Add a fold pattern directly to a sheetfed or web press run, and then
autogenerate duplications to build the Press Runs List for the product's
run list.

Select a fold pattern for an assembly part to set the default for its sections,
and then change the selection for individual sections as needed.
To duplicate fold patterns for use in a variable sheet position, duplicate an
existing section by holding the Option/Alt key and dragging the section to
the required location. The section's properties will be based on the original
section; however, the duplicated section has its own position controls that
you can access by right-clicking the section.
Use the Layouts search function to quickly find a fold pattern, based on
criteria such as page count, binding style, and name.
Using fold patterns reduces the need for maintaining large collections of
templates.
Use one fold pattern instead of multiple templates that are the
same except for the page and sheet sizes.
The search function also makes it easy to find all the templates
that use the same fold sequence.
Use custom profiles to store default page and sheet sizes for frequently
repeated jobs, or set the sizes on the fly for each job.
You can also change a fold pattern's pagination in a press-run section. When you
select the Page Numbering tool, highlighting indicates all suitable candidates that
can be used for page 1 without changing the fold pattern.
For specific bindery requirements, experienced users can define and store a
content transformation with a custom fold pattern. Instead of changing template
page orientation settings, you can flip and rotate the entire grid's pages relative to
the binding edge, such as for calendars and right-bound books.
Fold information is included in JDF output, for use by JDF-enabled bindery
equipment.

Customizing or creating a custom fold pattern resource

Preps software offers many ways to customize existing fold patterns or create
new unique custom fold patterns. You can use defined Custom Fold Patterns
(within JDF) with MIS workflows that reference Custom Fold Patterns.

Customizing an existing fold pattern

To add a resource to the Fold Patterns list, you select a fold pattern on which to
base the custom fold pattern.
For example, you might need to rotate a fold pattern's orientation on the sheet so
that its folds can follow the stock grain. You can apply the rotation for the one
job, or you can store it as a reusable fold pattern resource. Experienced users can
also create fold patterns that change the orientation of pages in reference to the
binding edge, such as for books that are bound on the right side or calendars with
head-to-foot pages.
67
1. Choose a method to access the Fold Pattern dialog box:
Select Resources > Fold Patterns.
In an assembly job, define a part with values for its Planned Page
Count and Largest Section, select a section to display its properties,
and in the Fold Patterns list, select Browse for fold pattern.
2. In the Fold Sets pane, choose a method to specify the fold pattern on which
to base the new resource:
Select a fold pattern from the search results in the Available Fold
Patterns list, or scroll through the JDF or custom fold patterns and
select a fold pattern.
A thumbnail of the selected fold pattern appears in the Preview
pane.
Select a fold set to display thumbnails of its fold patterns in the
Preview pane.
3. In the Preview pane, select a fold pattern thumbnail to activate its Rotate
and Flip buttons.
4. To change the orientation of the fold pattern, click Rotate and Flip, as
needed.
The thumbnail shows how the fold pattern will appear in the workspace
when you add it to a press run.
5. Skip this step if you do not need to designate a different binding edge.
Note: This is an advanced task for experienced users.
a. Ensure that the correct thumbnail is selected in the Preview pane,
and click Bind Edge.
b. In the Transformation list in the Bind Edge dialog box, choose a
rotation or flip increment to change the orientation of the pages in
reference to the binding edge.
For example, for a calendar, you might rotate right-side binding, the
pages might need to be flipped once.
c. When the desired transformation is displayed in Preview, click Select
.
In the Fold Pattern dialog box, the adjusted fold pattern thumbnail is
selected, and its buttons are activated.
6. Click Save As.
Note: When you click away from the thumbnail, its buttons revert to text
that display the current rotation amount and flip status.
7. Give the fold pattern a name, and optionally assign the fold pattern to a
new or existing fold set.
The fold pattern name and the name of its base fold pattern appear in the
Custom Fold Patterns list in the Fold Sets pane lists, in the Fold Patterns
list in the Layouts resource and Properties panes. The software stores the
list details in the FoldingPatterns.xml file in the Resources folder.
Note: Standard fold patterns are never affected by edits that you make
when creating a custom fold pattern.

68
Creating a custom fold pattern
The following procedures show you how to create a unique custom fold pattern.
The available options are:
Use an existing fold pattern and modify the page numbering.
Use the Create Imposition method, in order to define a specific number of
horizontal and vertical pages.
In both cases, use the following the basics rules for customizing a fold pattern:
Must start with a page number 1.
Must have all pages numbered sequentially, up to the maximum number
of pages defined. If necessary, you can use duplicate page numbers.
Note: You cannot use duplicate page numbers when you are working with
JDF fold patterns.
There can only be one section.
You can also save a custom fold pattern with a section that includes
independent pages. When adding these fold patterns to a Press Run you
will be prompted to set the independent page properties.
Multiple webs will be defined as multiple sheets for the custom fold
pattern.

Requirements:

1. Select the Fold Pattern that contains the correct number of horizontal and
vertical pages.
2. Click on the Page Numbering tool.
3. Find page 1, and continue to number the pages until all the pages have
been numbered.
4. Select File > Save As Custom Fold Pattern.
5. In the Custom Name field, enter a descriptive name for the result.
6. In the Save in Group field, you can also change the group that this fold
pattern is associated with. You can also enter a New Group Name if
required.
7. Click OK.

The fold pattern name now appears in the Custom Fold Patterns list, Fold Sets
lists, and Fold Patterns list in the Layouts resource and Properties panes. The
software stores the list details in the CustomFoldingPatterns.xml file in
the Resources folder.
Note: Standard fold patterns are never affected by edits that you make when
creating a custom fold pattern.

Using the Create Imposition method

1. In a new Preps job, add a stock item from Stock to the Press Runs view.

2. 69
 2. Select Job > Create Imposition.
3. Define the imposition page grid by specifying the page size and the
number of horizontal and vertical pages.
4. To control the Placement on Press Sheet, select:
Center horizontally or Fixed left margin
Center horizontally or Fixed bottom margin
Note: The Preps software does not automatically adjust the
imposition frame (blue rectangle) to reflect the Imposition
Properties.
5. Click OK.
6. If you require a multiple sheet (web) solution, right-click the Duplicate
Sheet icon, and select Duplicate as Web.
7. Click the Page Numbering tool.
8. Find your page 1, and continue to number until all the pages have been
numbered. If you had a multiple sheet web, ensure that you have
numbered all the pages on all the sheets.
9. Select File > Save As Custom Fold Pattern.
10. In the Custom Name field, enter a descriptive name for the result.
11. In the Save in Group field, you can also change the group that this fold
pattern is associated with. You can also enter a New Group Name, if
required.
12. Click OK.

Note: Using the Create Imposition method requires you to ensure that all the
pages are in the direction that you expect them to be. Unlike a traditional fold
pattern, you are not able to edit the bind edge properties. You can rotate the
entire custom fold pattern, but you cannot rotate individual pages.
The fold pattern name now appears in the Custom Fold Patterns list in the Fold
Sets pane lists, and in the Fold Patterns list in the Layouts resource and Properties
panes. Preps software stores the list details in the CustomFoldingPatterns.xml file
in the Resources folder.
Note: Standard fold patterns are never affected by edits that you make when
creating a custom fold pattern.

Fold Pattern dialog box

You can select, customize, and save a fold pattern under a new name, and
optionally group it with other fold patterns in a custom fold set.
Adding a fold pattern to a layout creates one imposition section in a specific
production orientation on the sheet, and you can rotate or flip the section on the
sheet.
Each fold pattern contains prenumbered template pages in a specific orientation
relative to the binding edge. For special binding requirements, you can access
another dialog box for transforming the pages relative to a different binding edge.

70
Fold Sets

Available Fold Patterns

Lists the patterns that match your specified page count

JDF Fold Pattern

Lists the available standard JDF patterns that are based on left-side binding for
production purposes.
The JDF fold pattern sets are grouped according to the number of pages in each
pattern. For example, select F8 to display thumbnails of all the standard 8pp fold
patterns.

Custom fold patterns

Displays the unique fold patterns that you created, listed individually or under the
group names that you defined.

Preview
The Preview pane displays the fold pattern or fold set that you select in the Fold
Sets list. If you open this dialog box after filtering it by page count, it displays the
patterns in the Available Fold Patterns list.
For standard JDF patterns, the CIP4 fold catalog identifier for this fold pattern is
displayed. For more details, see the CIP4 Pagination Catalog, available at
http://www.cip4.org/.
The following items appear for each previewed fold pattern.

Pattern name and grid

The name of the standard or custom fold pattern is followed by the number of
horizontal and vertical pages in this pattern's grid.

Thumbnail diagram
Each diagram shows the template page positions relative to the binding edge.
A symbol indicates the page head direction.
Cut lines are dashed, and fold lines are solid.
A solid line with gray shading indicates the binding edge.
A red solid-line symbol indicates the sheet reference corner, which is
dashed when the fold pattern is flipped.

Rotate
Clicking the fold pattern thumbnail activates this button.
When the thumbnail is not selected, it displays the current rotation.
Set the degree of rotation relative to the sheet's grip edge. Each successive click
of the activated button rotates the pattern thumbnail by 90 degrees.

71
 Flip
Clicking the fold pattern thumbnail activates this button.
When the thumbnail is not selected, it displays which side of this fold pattern will
by default be placed on the front of the press sheet for production purposes.
The default state is No (not flipped). Select Yes to flip the fold pattern.

Save As
Click to save the currently displayed thumbnail, rotation, and flip status as a
custom fold pattern. You can also save an unchanged standard fold pattern as a
custom pattern if you want to use a different name, or place it in a custom group.
In the Save Custom Fold Pattern dialog box, you can perform any of the following
actions:
Give the fold pattern a Custom Name.
Select an existing fold set in the Group list.
Type a new group name to create a fold set that contains this fold pattern.

Bind Edge
Displays the Bind Edge dialog box
Experienced users can apply flip and rotate transformations to change the
orientation of the pages relative to the binding edge. For more details, see the
CIP4 Pagination Catalog, available at http://www.cip4.org/.

Templates
Templates are standalone files that store complete information about reusable
layouts for a specific binding style. Information about each unique layout is stored
in a template signature within the template, including its media, press sheet size,
work style, template page positions, and marks. Templates are useful for
frequently repeated jobs.
The Templates list contains complete, reusable layouts that predefine the press
sheet dimensions and template page sizes, positions, and numbering for specific
binding styles.
Preps includes a selection of sample templates, and you can save frequently
repeated jobs as templates. When setting up Preps, you might create non-
customer jobs with layouts for the purpose of creating templates.
Note: You can also migrate and continue to use existing templates from previous
versions of the software.
The Layouts search tool makes it easy to find the right template for an imposition.
However, if you must store and retrieve a unique template for most jobs, it can be
more efficient to use a fold pattern resource instead, which allows you to change
the stock, page sizes, and individual trims, as needed.
Note: When you apply a template resource to a job, the layouts are added to the

72
 JOB file, and the original template is no longer referenced. If you separately edit
and resave the template that you used for this job, the changes are not
automatically applied when you reopen the job. To apply the changes, you must
reapply the template.

Saving a job as a template

You can store frequently repeated jobs or press-run layouts as a reusable
template resource.

1. Start a job and build the layouts that you want to save as a template.
2. To save the layouts as a template, select File > Save As Template.
3. In the Partial Signature Placement dialog box, specify where to position the
partial signature relative to the full signatures when the template is applied.
(Sometimes the number of run-list pages is not an even multiple of the
number of pages in the full signature in a template. To prevent an
excessive quantity of blank pages and to use paper and press time
efficiently, you typically add a partial signature to templates.)
4. Give the template a name, and select a location in the Templates folder

On the Mac OS: The name can be up to 31 characters long,

including the .tpl file extension. Avoid using special characters,
particularly if you might open this file on a computer that is running
Microsoft Windows.
On Windows: The name can be up to 50 characters long, including
the .tpl file extension. The name can contain spaces, but cannot
contain any special characters, such as \ | : " " ? < > /
Each unique press-run layout is stored as a template signature
within the template's TPL file in the Templates folder. The new
resource appears in the Templates list in the Layouts pane.

Note: When you apply a template resource to a job, the layouts are added to the
JOB file, and the original template is no longer referenced. If you separately edit
and resave the template that you used for this job, the changes are not
automatically applied when you reopen the job. To apply the changes, you must
reapply the template.
If you later rename a template file, the result is either two identical files with
different names, or one file with two different names: one that you can see
(external name), and one that Preps uses (internal name). The results depend on
whether you rename the template from within Preps or outside of Preps.

Creating a new media resource

To add a resource to the Media list, prepare a media configuration for a specific
target device. You can set up a media configuration for any valid size that is
defined in the device-specific PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files in the
Printers folder.

73
 The Preps software DVD provides several PPD files, and you can obtain the most
current PPD files directly from the manufacturer of your imaging device. If a
device is already installed on your operating system, you can use a copy of the
system's PPD file.

1. Copy the new device PPD file and paste it to the \Printers\ppd\
folder.
The name of the PPD file must end in .ppd, and contain no special
characters.
Note: You can skip this step if the PPD file is already installed.
2. Select Resources > New Media.
3. Select the Media Type.
The Media Type list displays all the media for which a device PPD file
exists in the \Printers\ppd\ folder.
Note: To create a virtual media configuration that is equal to or larger than
the stock size, select Press Sheet Size.
4. Provide a meaningful nickname for the new media configuration, and click
OK.
5. In the Media Configuration dialog box, select the size, and set any other
options that you need.
Note: For Press Sheet Size media configurations, you cannot change the
Size (PressSheetSize). However, you can optionally increase the size of the
output by specifying top, bottom, and side margins. You cannot set
margins for other media types.
6. Close the dialog box.
The new media resource appears in the Media list in the Resources pane.
The software stores the details for each media in a <MediaName>
\printer.ppd file in the Printers folder.

Creating a new stock resource

To add a resource to the Stocks list, you define its press sheet size and provide
additional details for your own reference.
A list of sample stock sizes is provided to help you get started. The following
procedure bases a new resource on an existing resource.

1. In the Resources pane, click Stock to expand the list.

2. Select an existing stock that is similar to the new stock resource that you
want to define.
3. Right-click the stock, and select Duplicate.
4. Edit the properties, and save the stock with a new name.
Information that you can store includes the stock name, manufacturer,
dimensions, weight, and grain direction. Web-fed stock dimensions
represent the size of the roll width by the cutoff length.
The new stock appears in the Stock list in the Resources pane. The
software stores the list details in the sheets.xml file in the Printers
folder.

74
Creating a new mark resource
To add a new resource to the Marks list, you define a mark that is based on an
existing SmartMarks (SMK) file. You can create, edit, and duplicate individual
marks or groups as needed.

1. On the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box, set the default Templates
, Marks, and Resources path for this installation.
2. Choose a method to create or modify a mark:
Select Resources > New SmartMark, choose a mark type, and edit
its name and properties.
In the Marks list, right-click a mark to use as the basis, select
Duplicate or Edit, edit its name and properties, and save the mark
or a copy of the mark with a new name.
3. Save the mark to a location in the /Marks/SmartMarks/ folder.
The mark's positioning information is stored in its <MarkName>.smk file.
Important: Only marks that are stored in this folder appear in the Marks
list.
4. Optional: Create a group of marks that can be added and automatically
positioned simultaneously:
a. Create a new subfolder within the SmartMarks folder, with a
name to identify this mark group.
b. Drag or copy the SMK files for this group into the new folder.
An info.smg file stores the information about the group in the
same folder as the individual SMK files.

The marks and groups that you create appear in the Marks list in the Resources
pane.

Press Runs view reference

In the Press Runs view, create and interactively edit and preview any number of
sheetfed and multiweb press runs to accommodate the job's pages. Manage the
stock, media, marks, and layout for each sheet or web.

The View menu in the Press Runs view

The View menu lets you control the details that you see in the workspace. You
can toggle these menu items between showing and hiding the specified items.

Show Dimensions
Displays the layout dimensions, including distances between page edges or
centers (depending on settings in the Preferences dialog box) and between
adjacent pages and press sheet edges. Select a layout element to edit its text
boxes.

75
 Show Page Previews
Displays a preview of all page content

Show Page Sizes

Displays the width and height of the selected page, page group, mark, stock, or
media

Show Trim Boxes

Displays a dark blue box that indicates the page trim size

Show Bleed Boxes

Displays a red box that shows the page bleed margins

Show File Page Numbers

Displays the input file's page number on each page

Show File Names

Displays the input file name on each page. If Show File Page Numbers is also
selected, the page number is added to the file name.

Show Template Page Numbers

Displays the page numbers at the center of each page

Show Marks, Show Pages

Displays or hides the pages or marks. For example, turning off the display of
pages makes it easier to check or select marks.

Show Tiles
Displays the tiles and tile marks, if applicable

Show Group Count

Displays the number of pages in each ganged or step-and-repeat page group

Show Folio
Displays the folio that you assigned in the Pages List

Press Runs List

Use the tools and settings in the Press Runs List to manually build and manage a
job's press runs. You can also use AutoGang, AutoSelect, product intent for
assemblies, or JDF automation to generate the list. Selecting a press run, sheet,

76
web, or side in the Press Runs List displays it in the workspace.
Tip: Drag the column edges to adjust their widths. Drag the column headers to
rearrange the columns.

Duplicate Sheet

Adds a copy of the current press run with layout and without content.
Right-click this tool to insert a duplicate of the current press-run layout as a new
web in the same press run. Adding a web to a sheetfed press run converts it to a
web press run. When you use the Duplicate Sheet button to duplicate a press run,
you can designate the number of duplicated press runs and specify whether to
place them before, after, or between other press runs in the list.
Note: You can also designate number and placement when you duplicate or
create new sheets using the Edit menu or a keyboard shortcut: Command+D or
Ctrl+D for duplicating or Command+T or Ctrl+T for adding.

Delete Sheet

Removes the current press run and any layouts that it contains.
Right-click this tool to delete a web of the current press-run layout.

Move Down, Move Up

When you move a press run, the Press Run ID numbers are updated
accordingly. Moving a press run up or down does not change the product section
numbers.
Single View, Multi View

Press Run ID
This column lists the press runs by a sequentially assigned number, which simply
describes its position in the list. You can expand a press run to display its
component sheets, webs, or sides. Selecting a press run in this list displays it in
the workspace and its settings in the Properties pane.

Work Style
View or select the work style that describes how the press prints the press sheet:
Sheetwise
Work and Turn
Work and Tumble
Perfector
Single-sided

Sections
Lists each product section that appears on this press run one or more times,
identified by the product letter and product section number
77
 Colors
Displays the actual content colors that are defined in the PDF input files (not
editable).
Note: Use the Pages view to check for discrepancies between planned and actual
colors.

Stock
The name of the stock resource that you assigned to this press run

Media
The name of the media resource that you assigned to this press run

Template
If a template was used to build this press run, displays the template name.
Otherwise, a default Untitled name is assigned, with a number that increments
for each existing Untitled template in the Templates list. If you save the current
job as a template, the new name is displayed.

Template Signature
If a template was used to build this press run, displays the template signature
name. Otherwise, an editable default name is assigned, starting at Untitled Sig 1
and incrementing for each unique layout.

Run Length
The number of times that this press run must run through the press to print the
required product quantity.
For example, if a customer requires 5000 copies of a flat-work product, and you
gang the product 5-up on the press run, then you will specify a Run Length of
1000.

Generate Press Runs

The required number of press runs and impositions is automatically generated,
and the run-list pages flow into position according to the template page
numbering.

Work styles for press sheets and webs

Each press sheet or web in a press run is assigned a work style, which describes
how the press sheet will run on the press.
The default work style is defined on the General tab in the Preferences dialog box,
and can be Sheetwise, Work and Turn, Work and Tumble, single-sided, or
perfector.

78
Sheetwise
Sheetwise is one of the most common work styles. Different plates are used to
print the front and back of the press sheet.

The paper is run through a press to print the front side of the sheet. It is then turned
over on the vertical axis and run through the press again using the same gripper
edge, and a second plate is used to print the back side of the sheet.
Web presses also use the sheetwise style, but they print both sides in a single pass.
For digital and on-demand output, you usually use the sheetwise work style, and
the press sheet size is the size of the paper on which the job is printed.

Work and Turn

For a work-and-turn work style, both sides of the imposition are imaged on the
same plate.

The imposition is divided in half at the vertical center so that the images for the front
are on one half and the images for the back are on the other.
After the first side of a work-and-turn imposition is printed, the sheet is turned over
on the vertical axis so that the second side can be printed using the same gripper
edge. After printing, the sheet is cut in half before folding, creating two identical
copies.

Work and Tumble

For a work-and-tumble work style, both sides are imaged on the same plate.

79
The imposition is divided in half at the horizontal center so that the images for the
front are on one half and the images for the back are on the other.
After the first side of a work-and-tumble imposition is printed, the sheet is turned
over on the horizontal axis so that the second side can be printed using opposite
grippers, gripping first the leading edge, then turning the sheet over to grip from the
tail edge.
After printing, the sheet is cut in half before folding, creating two identical copies.

Single-sided
For a single-sided work style, the press sheet has only a front side.

This work style is commonly used for flat work such as posters, business cards, and
labels.

Perfector
The perfector work style is used for a sheetfed perfecting press. Perfecting
presses print both sides of the paper in one pass.

After the first side of the press sheet is printed, it is turned over on the horizontal
axis, changing the gripper to the opposite edge so that the second side can be

80
 printed.
For a perfector work style, the back side of the press sheet is automatically rotated
180 degrees.

Work styles in the workspace

Your work style selection affects how the press sheet and pages appear in the
workspace.
For example, the workspace displays an entire side of a work-and-turn or work-
and-tumble sheet. A dashed line indicates where the sheet will be cut after the
first side is printed, the sheet is turned, and the other side is printed, resulting in
two identical copies per sheet.
Whenever you place a page at one side of the sheet in the workspace, a mirrored
image of its back page appears on the other side, because that is where it will be
when the sheet runs through the press the second time. Marks and gutters are
similarly reflected, and you can reposition pages on either side to automatically
update both sides.
The following example shows a work-and-tumble layout with one page ready for
step and repeat:

You can change a press sheet's work style at any time, and the layout is updated
immediately in the workspace.
The following example shows the result when you change a Sheetwise layout to
Work and Turn:

Press Runs workspace

Use the Press Runs workspace to interactively build, preview, and adjust a job's
press-run layouts.
Select a press run, sheet, web, or side in the Press Runs List to display it in the
workspace. Selecting an element in the workspace displays its settings in the
Properties pane.
Dimensions can be edited directly in the workspace by typing in the text boxes or
by dragging items.

81
Tip: To control which details are displayed, use the View menu and workspace
toolbar.
For information about specific layout elements in the workspace, see the
applicable topics.

Select
Use this tool for most mouse tasks.
Click an object to select it.
Press and hold Shift while clicking multiple objects.
Drag a marquee around multiple objects.
Click one page in a group to automatically select all of the pages in the
group.

Direct Select
Select an item within another object, such as an imposition page inside an
imposition.

Page Numbering

Click this tool and then select a page to automatically number or renumber
it.
To manually renumber a selected page, edit the Page Number box that appears
under the tool bar.
Note: Imposition pages can be dynamically renumbered when you use a fold
pattern. For all other impositions, you must manually number or renumber the
pages.
Pages in fold patterns are pre-numbered, and you can renumber them.
When you select this tool after placing a fold pattern in the workspace, the
valid low-folio page positions are highlighted.
Clicking a highlighted page designates it as a low folio.
The remaining pages are automatically numbered.
Designating more than one low folio creates multiple sections.
If you renumber a page, the remaining pages are automatically
renumbered.
Clicking or renumbering a non-valid page changes the fold pattern.
Impositions that you create using the Create Imposition dialog box must be
manually numbered or renumbered. Impositions that are based on a template can
be renumbered.
After selecting the tool, the first page that you click is the low folio, and
you can click the remaining imposition pages in sequence to number or
renumber all the pages.

82
 To create multiple deliveries of the same product, designate multiple
pages as page 1.

Add Independent Pages / Convert to Spreads

Add independent pages or convert existing section pages to independent

pages.
To add a new independent page, select the tool or use the Add Independent Pages
menu item in the Job menu or use the copy and paste operation. Adding a new
independent page creates a new part and section in the product tree.
To convert an existing section page to an independent page, select it and then
select the tool. When converting an imposition or fold pattern page, you have the
option of converting Front, Back, or Both. Signatures that contain independent
pages can be saved as custom fold patterns and added to the fold pattern library.
When the new or converted independent page is selected, you can edit its page
properties.
When two or more pages are selected at the same time, the Add Independent
Pages tool acts as a Convert to Spreads tool. When converting imposition or fold
pattern pages, you have the option of converting Front, Back, or Both. To select
more than one page at the same time with the Direct Select tool, hold down
the Ctrl key while selecting the additional pages. Crop marks are automatically
adjusted to accommodate the new page size, and fold marks are automatically
added if gutters exist between the series of selected pages to indicate fold/spine
width dimensions.

Pan

Drag your view of the workspace

Zoom

Click the object or general area that you want to inspect more closely, or
drag a marquee around a specific area.

Step & Repeat

After selecting this tool, click a PDF page, section, or placeholder to quickly
duplicate it across the sheet by dragging the mouse away from the PDF. Or you
can click an empty area on the sheet to drop a step-and-repeat placeholder. You
can make additional adjustments based on the S&R properties.

AutoGang

Generate the job's AutoGang list from all Files list pages.

83
Show Page Previews

Display a preview of all page content..

Show Dimensions
Display the layout dimensions, including distances between edges or
centers, depending on your Preferences and View menu selections.

Hide Pages
Hide all pages on press runs.

Hide Marks
Hide all marks on press runs.

Hide Gutter Lines

Hide all gutter lines on press runs.

Rotate

Rotate the selected section or template page. The content follows the
template page orientation.

Group, Ungroup

Create or break apart a group of selected sections or ganged pages.

Flip

Flip your view of the sheet. The result depends on the selected work style:
Sheetwise: Flips on the vertical axis. The grip edge still appears at the
bottom.
Perfector: Flips on the horizontal axis. Your view of the grip edge position
changes.

Transparency

To view the press sheet as if it were on a light table, slide the

control button to adjust transparency.

Layout selector
Switch the workspace between multiple webs that you selected in the Press Runs
List.

84
 Single View, Multi View

Toggles the Press Runs view between:

Single signature view: one surface of a press run
Multi signature view: all surfaces of the press run, including front and back
or top and bottom In the case of multi-web, all webs are displayed in one
view.

Layout dimensions in the workspace

Set preferences, select View menu options, and click workspace tools to control
the display of dimensions in the workspace.
The default unit, distance measurement type, and snap type are defined
on the General tab in the Preferences dialog box.
In the workspace, most applicable text boxes become editable when you
click a page or section. Some can be edited only in the Properties pane.
Measurements that are not in an editable state appear in dimmed text
boxes with no borders.
A lock icon appears on any pages or sections that cannot be
repositioned. (Marks are locked by default.) Objects that can be locked or
unlocked include a check box in their Properties pane, or you can use the
Objects menu.
If you edit the distance between a locked, ganged page and an adjacent
page, the locked page does not move, even if it is the page that you
selected. Only the adjacent page moves.

Measurement Description

Page or page group dimensions Select Show Page Sizes to display

gray lines and text boxes for the
width and height of a selected
object. A dashed blue border
indicates a selected group.
Finished page dimensions can be
edited only on the Template Page
tab in the Properties pane.
The dimensions of a placed media
or stock cannot be edited in the
workspace.

85
 Measurement Description

Margins between stock edge and Lines and text boxes indicate sheet
selected page, section, or media margins, and you can edit the text
edges boxes to reposition the objects.

Center to center distances Select Show Dimensions to display

lines and text boxes for the
distances between the centers of
equal-sized and aligned objects.

Trim edge to trim edge distances Select Show Dimensions to display

lines between the edges of a
selected object (page or section)
and any adjacent edges of the
same object type, such as to show
gap, gutter, or trim widths.

Note:
A gutter is the space between the trim edges of any two rows of pages or
sections on a press sheet, as in pages within a ganged page group or an
imposition page grid.
A gap is the space between two independent (or ganged) pages on a
press sheet.
A trim is a gutter or margin area that will be trimmed from a final page.

Press run properties

In the Press Runs List, select a press run to display its settings in the Properties
pane.

Page Count
The number of template pages on this press-run layout

86
Fold Pattern
Select from the filtered list of fold patterns that match the section page count, or
click Browse for fold pattern to display the Fold Pattern dialog box.

Template Name
If a template was used to build this press run, displays the template name.
Otherwise, a default Untitled name is assigned, with a number that increments
for each existing Untitled template in the Templates list. If you save the current
job as a template, the new name is displayed.

Signature Name
If a template was used to build this press run, displays the template signature
name. Otherwise, an editable default name is assigned, starting at Untitled Sig 1
and incrementing for each unique layout.

Auto Select Signature

If you select this check box (default), the Auto Select option is added to the
context menu for this template signature in the Layouts resource pane.

Section Count
The number of times that you added a product section to this press-run layout.
You can add one or more product sections to a single press run, including the
same product section multiple times or multiple different sections, typically for
the same product.

Binding Style
Determines the sequence in which content pages flow through the template
pages on the press-run layouts:
Flat Work (no binding)
Perfect Bound
Saddle Stitched
Come and Go
Cut and Stack
Mixed (more than one binding style)

Work Style
View or select the work style that describes how the press prints the press sheet:
Sheetwise
Work and Turn
Work and Tumble
87
 Perfector
Single-sided

Stock
The name of the stock resource that you assigned to this press run

Media
The name of the media resource that you assigned to this press run

Width, Height
The dimensions of the stock for this press run

Punch Distance
If the media has a punch, specify the distance from the press sheet edge
to the punch center.
The punch is the hole on which the media can be anchored on pins for accurate
alignment (also referred to as setback).

Binding styles
The binding style determines the sequence in which job pages flow through an
imposition's template pages. You can set a general default binding style in the
Preferences dialog box, optionally change the default for a specific product or
part, and assign binding styles to individual product sections.
The following binding styles are available.

Perfect Bound
Content pages flow through the template pages in their run-list sequence.

Saddle Stitched
An equal number of pages flow from the beginning and the end of the run list
through the sections, starting by default with the largest section.

88
Come and Go
In a come-and-go job, the entire run list flows twice through the same press runs,
which are automatically divided into two press-run sections. The template pages
are numbered so that the run list first flows through the first section in run-list
sequence, and through the second section in reverse sequence. The resulting two
identical books are perfect-bound together on a common edge, and then cut
apart.

Cut and Stack

This binding style lays out an entire book on one multisheet press run with two
(or more) template pages per sheet. The necessary number of sheets are
automatically generated to accommodate the content, based on the number of
pages in the imposition grid and the total number of run-list pages. Starting with
the first sheet, the run list flows sequentially through the first template page
(front and back) on all the sheets. It then starts again at the first sheet and flows
through the next template page, and so on.

Flat Work (no binding)

Select this binding style for products that are not bound, such as posters, inserts,
business cards, and leaflets.

Mixed binding styles

If a part's product sections use multiple binding styles, the Binding Style property
is Mixed.

89
Press-run section properties
Select a section in the Products list or workspace to display its settings in the
Properties pane.
The Part Name, Part Type, and Binding Style are derived from the part properties.
The ability to edit properties can also depend on whether you are viewing a press-
run section in the Press Runs view or a product section in the Assembly view, and
whether you create the imposition in the section from a fold pattern or sheet-
based imposition.

Part Name
Use or edit the default name.

Part Type
Can be Cover, Text, or Flat Work

Section
The number that determines the binding order of the product sections. If the
product sections are rearranged in the workspace, the section numbers are
automatically adjusted to reflect the new sequence.

Lock
Select this check box to prevent this product section from being rearranged
within the assembly.

First Page Number

Determines the starting page and range of run-list pages that will be printed in
this section, based on its page count

Trim Size
The planned width and height of the printed product page, after it is bound and
trimmed. The default dimensions are defined on the General tab in the
Preferences dialog box.

Template Name
If a template was used to build this press run, displays the template name.
Otherwise, a default Untitled name is assigned, with a number that increments
for each existing Untitled template in the Templates list. If you save the current
job as a template, the new name is displayed.

Page Count
The number of pages in this component

90
Fold Pattern
Select from the filtered list of fold patterns that match the section page count, or
click Browse for fold pattern to display the Fold Pattern dialog box.

Binding Style
The style that determines the sequence in which the run-list pages flow through
the template pages on the press-run layouts

Reference Page
Applies only to sheet-based impositions that you create or add from a template.
Select the orientation of the section's lower-left page, which serves as the
reference for the other pages in this section.

Lay out additional page

Applies only to sheet-based impositions that you create or add from a template.
Select the orientation of the other pages in this section, relative to each other,
based on the reference page.
The following properties can be edited only in the Press Runs view:

Fold Flip
Select Yes to flip the fold pattern.

Fold Rotation
Set the degree of rotation relative to the sheet's grip edge. Select one of the
available rotations or select Optimize to allow Preps to calculate the best fit.

Bind Edge
Experienced users can apply flip and rotate transformations to change the
orientation of the pages relative to the binding edge. For more details, see the
CIP4 Pagination Catalog, available at http://www.cip4.org/.

Head Trim, Foot Trim, Face Trim, Spine, Front Lip, Back Lip
The applicable gutter or margin widths that will be trimmed from the page edges.
This applies only to impositions that are based on a fold pattern and is editable
after you select a Fold Pattern.
In addition to setting individual trim margins, you can set a spine width (for the
backbone of a book cover) and lip widths (for example, to create overfold edges
on the front or back page of the folded signature).

Planned Colors
Select or type the names of the colors that are planned for this item.

91
 Colors
Displays the actual content colors that are defined in the PDF input files (not
editable).
Note: Use the Pages view to check for discrepancies between planned and actual
colors.

Comments
Type a note that you or other operators can review and edit.

Creating press-run layouts

Using the Layouts Search tool

Use the Layouts Search tool to quickly find a suitable layout resource for a press
run.

1. On the Layouts pane, click the Search tool.

The search options that appear depend on whether you already used this
tool.
2. If no criteria selection list appears, click [+].
3. In the criteria selection list, choose Page Count, and specify how many
page positions are required in the layout.
This filters the lists in the Layouts pane.
4. Click [+] as needed to add criteria and narrow the search results. You can
specify:
Name
Page Count
Binding Style
Work Style
Page Size
Stock Size
Page Grid (horizontal: X, vertical: Y)
Section Count
Media
5. Review the filtered list of layouts.
6. If the results are not satisfactory, repeat the search with different criteria.
You can:
Change criteria selections.
Click [–] to remove criteria.
Click Reset to clear all your criteria selections, and start over with
new selections.
92
 Select and add the resource to a press run, and continue defining the layout.

Building press runs using template, fold pattern, or step-and-repeat pattern

resources
Use the Layouts Search tool to quickly find a suitable fold pattern or template for
creating a press-run layout. When you use fold patterns, you can also change the
default page and sheet sizes as needed.

1. On the Layouts pane, click the Search tool.

The search options that appear depend on whether you already used this
tool.
2. If no criteria selection list appears, click [+].
3. In the criteria selection list, choose Page Count, and specify how many
page positions are required in the layout.
This filters the lists in the Layouts pane.
4. Click [+] as needed to add criteria and narrow the search results. You can
specify:
Name
Page Count
Binding Style
Work Style
Page Size
Stock Size
Page Grid (horizontal: X, vertical: Y)
Section Count
Media
5. Review the filtered list of layouts.
6. If the results are not satisfactory, repeat the search with different criteria.
You can:
Change criteria selections.
Click [–] to remove criteria.
Click Reset to clear all your criteria selections, and start over with
new selections.
7. Select a Templates or Fold Patterns layout, and drag it to the press sheet.
If you select a fold pattern:
The template pages are pre-numbered according to the fold
sequence.
The page size is derived from the General tab on the
Preferences dialog box.

93
 The Properties pane displays the section's properties,
including the fold pattern name.

If you select a template:

The template pages are numbered by the template.
The page size is derived from the template signature.
The Properties pane displays the section's properties,
including the template and template signature name.
And in either case:
In the Press Runs List, the Section column for this press run
displays a sequentially assigned product and section
number for the new imposition, and the same information
appears on the new section's pages in the workspace.
In the Pages List, a run-list page position is created for each
imposition page position.
The Products list includes a new section and section page
count.
8. In the Press Runs List, select the press run.
9. In the Properties pane, select the Auto Select Signature check box.
10. Drag the customer's PDF file from its folder location or the Files list to the
low-folio position of the imposition.
The pages flow through the template pages in sequence.
The required number of press runs and impositions is automatically
generated to accommodate the run-list pages, which flow into
position according to the template page numbering.
If you switch to the Pages view, you will see that the run list
contains the PDF file's pages. It shows the file name and actual
color for each page, including any pages that are not yet placed.
11. In the workspace, check and adjust the layouts and trims as needed.
If you used a fold pattern, you can edit individual head, foot, face, spine,
and lip trims. If you used a template, you can edit one gutter to apply the
same gutter width to every page in the page grid.
12. In the Marks list, select and double-click marks or a mark group to add
them to the currently selected press-run layout.
The mark name remains highlighted in the Marks list until you delete or
edit the placed instance of this mark.

Using AutoSelect to generate press runs from a run list

Autoselecting a template or fold pattern imposes a product's run list by flowing
its pages into the required number of autogenerated press runs.
This method works best for products with standard page counts that can be

94
 evenly divided into the autoselected page grid.
Autoselecting a template instead of a single page grid (fold pattern or template
signature) applies the template signatures that will print the fewest possible
pages.

1. In the Pages view, set up the product's run list.

2. In the Layouts pane, select and right-click a template or fold pattern.
3. Choose Auto Select.
The run-list pages flow into position in the generated press runs.
4. In the Press Runs view, check and adjust the results as needed.

Multiple imposition sections on a press run

A press-run layout can contain multiple identical or unique product sections to
control placement of pages.
Identical sections can be used to print multiple deliveries of a product or product
section on the same press run, or you can organize an imposition into multiple
sections to flow the pages through different press runs and still be able to collate
them correctly.
You can use multiple imposition sections for a variety of purposes. For example,
use them to:
Run a few color pages of a job on the same press sheet. You can use
normal collation marks and text marks to identify the sections, without
additional custom marks. You can restrict marks to print on specific
sections.
Print two or more sections of a book product on a single sheetfed or
multiple-web press run as the content becomes available. Identifying
marks can be used to collate the parts and produce the correct final page
order.
Print sections with different binding styles on the same press run.
Break up a large printing job into press runs.
Run the color sections in one press run, and run the black-and-white
sections in the other press runs.
Print similar sections from different products on one press run.
Print product sections out of order if some of the input files are not yet
available.
Run a job on a very large sheetfed or web press run.
On one press run, print multiple small sections that small folding
equipment can accommodate.
Avoid problems by splitting sections when more folds are required than
can be accommodated by the paper or folding equipment, or when media
is difficult to fold.
Managing multiple sections

95
 Each page is identified by a section number as well as a page number, to define
the page flow.
All sections on a press run respect shingling and marks, including press sheet
sluglines ($sig variable) and collation marks.
You can also renumber the sections and pages, including locked page numbers,
such as to reprint or replace pages in a completed job. Or, if you print selected
sections for an incomplete product, the collation marks might need to stay in the
correct order.

Creating an imposition without using a Layouts resource

When you do not use a fold pattern or template Layouts resource, an imposition's
fold sequence is determined by the section binding style and manual page
numbering.
Note: We use the term imposition to refer to a fold-based layout for bound
products.
You typically use this method when no available fold pattern or template matches
a product's requirements for gutters, page numbering, and page orientation.

1. Start a new job for an actual job or to set up a new template. Optional: Set
up a run list.
2. Select Job > New Sheet to start a new press run.
A new press run is added in the Press Runs List and displayed in the
workspace.
3. Change the stock and media selections, if needed.
4. Select Job > Create Imposition.
5. Define the imposition page grid by specifying the page size and the
number of horizontal and vertical pages.
The default page size is defined on the General tab in the Preferences
dialog box.
6. Define the number of sections needed for the Press Run.
7. Specify the page orientation for the reference page and other pages in the
grid.
Note: You can do this only if the Fold Pattern is None.
8. Click OK.
The press run in the workspace contains the page grid that you
defined.
The template pages are numbered according to the default binding
style.
If the run list is already set up, the run-list pages flow automatically
through the template pages.
9. If the run list contains more pages to place, click the Duplicate Sheet tool in
the Press Runs List toolbar as often as needed to place all the pages.

10. 96
 10. In the layout, select a press-run section to display, and select the binding
style and set other options as needed in the Properties pane.
You can optionally double-click the section to display the Modify
Imposition dialog box.

11. In the layout, click and edit the gutter text boxes to set the face, foot, and
head trims, and drag a section or edit its margin text boxes to reposition it
on the press sheet.
Note: The same gutters and margins are applied to each duplicate of this
press run.
12. Number or renumber the template pages as needed:
a. In the workspace, click the Page Numbering tool.
In the layout, any page that is a suitable low-folio candidate is
highlighted.
b. Click a template page to designate it as the low folio for this press-
run section.
The back page is automatically numbered, and any page that is a
candidate for the next page number is highlighted.
c. Click pages in succession until all pages are numbered according to
the binding style and desired fold sequence.
The same numbering scheme is applied to each duplicate of this
press run, and the run-list pages now flow through the press-run
sections according to the new page numbering.
d. When you number for multiple sections, with the right button
mouse, select the section number from the drop-down menu. Then
number the pages for that section accordingly.
13. In the Marks list, select and double-click marks to add to the layouts.
14. To save the layouts as a template, select File > Save As Template.

Creating a cut-and-stack press run

Use this method to print one entire book per digital press run. Each press run
consists of multiple sheets with the book pages imposed multiple-up. The printed
sheets are split into page blocks, which are stacked to produce one correctly
paginated product.

Note: Because a cut-and-stack press run is used for a single product, you do not
need to plan an assembly.

1. In the Press Runs view, add the stock.

2. Select Job > Create Imposition.

3. 97
 3. Define the imposition page grid by specifying the page size and the
number of horizontal and vertical pages.
For example, you might use a 2-by-1 page grid if you are running two A4-
size pages on an ISO A3 press sheet (or two letter-size pages on a tabloid
ANSI B press sheet).
4. Number the pages using the Page Numbering tool.
5. In the Products list, select the product part.
6. In the Properties pane, set the required total page count for this cut-and-
stack product under Planned Page Count.
7. Click Generate Press Runs.
The necessary number of sheets are automatically generated to
accommodate the content, based on the number of pages in the imposition
grid and the total number of run-list pages. Starting with the first sheet, the
run list flows sequentially through the first template page (front and back)
on all the sheets. It then starts again at the first sheet and flows through
the next template page, and so on.
8. Assign PDF pages by dragging the PDF to the imposition, or assign them in
the Pages view.

Multiweb layouts
You can create a web press run with any number of webs, and then insert, delete,
move, or copy webs as needed. The same zoom level and relative focal point is
maintained as you toggle between the webs in the workspace.
Webs provide flexible options for working with sections:
When you duplicate a web that contains an imposition section, the
imposition is duplicated, and the page numbering is auto-updated across
all the webs.
You can also number or renumber the pages on each web individually.
The pages for one product section can be laid out across all the webs in a
press run.
The printed press sheets that are cut from the web rolls can be placed on
top of each other and folded to form a single signature.
Each web in a press run can be shared by multiple sections.
For example, when three sections are laid out across two webs in a press-
run layout, the printed press sheets are cut from the web rolls and cut
again to split out the three sections. Each section results in one signature.

Creating come-and-go layouts

Use this 2-up layout of different sections to produce two stacks of identical books
that require fewer plates and less makeready time, compared to 2-up layouts of
identical sections. Come-and-go jobs are often printed on web presses and
finished on 5-knife trimmers that can cut out two books at once.

98
1. In the Pages view, set up the product run list with the required number of
PDF pages.
2. If you are using the Press Runs view (without using the Assembly view):
a. Use the Search tool to specify Come and Go in the Binding Style list.
The Templates list is filtered to display only come-and-go
templates.
b. Right-click a template and select AutoSelect.
3. If you are using the Assembly view, set up a product and part:
a. Set up the part with the same number of pages as the run list.
b. In the Binding Style list, select Come and Go.
c. Select the number of pages for the Largest Section to automatically
create the necessary number of sections.
d. Select the Press Type (Sheetfed or Web).
If you select Web, specify the number of webs.
e. Set other part properties as needed.
f. In the workspace, select all the sections.
You can drag a marquee around the sections, or select one section,
then press Command/Ctrl+A.
g. In the Properties pane, select a suitable Fold Pattern.
h. Set up other section properties as needed.
i. Click Generate Press Runs.
The imposition layouts are automatically generated, and the Press
Runs List contains as many webs or sheetfed press runs as needed
to accommodate the run-list pages.

99
 The printed signature from one sheet is flipped and stacked on the
signature from the other sheet, resulting in two complete books that
are still adjoined. One book is "coming" and the other is "going".
The two books are then perfect-bound on a common edge, cut
apart, and trimmed.

Multiple product support with Come and Go

You can now combine two products with Come & Go sections
The following is an example of creating two products with Come and Go sections.
Product(A):

Product(B)

Select Come and Go With in the property pane of Product(A). When you set
Come and Go With as Product(B), the Come and Go sections from Product(A)-
Part2 and Product(B)-Part2 are combined. After you generate the press runs, A2
and B4 are combined into one impositon layout, A3 and B3 are combined into
another imposition layout, and A4 and B2 are also combined into the other
imposition layout. A1, B1 are on their own independent imposition layout.
Note: To combine two products correctly, when generating the press runs, the
software checks if Product(A)-Part2 and Product(B)-Part2 have the same binding
style, page count, and section count. The software also checks if sections A2 and
A3 have the same trim size, the same fold pattern, and so on.

Creating a sub-section (ribbon) press with a Custom Fold Pattern

Creating a press that has sub-sections (or ribbons) using a Custom Fold Pattern
involves two steps:

1. Creating the Custom Folding Pattern that will be used to generate the sub-
section (ribbon) layout
2. Creating a sub-section (ribbon) layout from the Custom Fold Pattern

Step 1: Create the Custom Folding Pattern that will be used to generate the
sub-section (ribbon) layout:
This example creates a 4-ribbon layout of the F8-5 folding pattern.

1. Create a new Preps Job and set the Product Binding to Perfect Bound.

2. 100
 2. Add the 30x40 Stock to the Press Run.
3. Add the fold pattern F8-5 to the Press Run.
4. With the section selected, set Fold Flipto Yes and Fold Rotation to 90.
For now, do not change the position.
5. Duplicate as Web three times to get a total of 32 pages.
6. Go to the File menu and select Save as a custom fold pattern.

Step 2: Use the Custom Folding Pattern to create the sub-section (ribbon)
press run:

1. Create a new Preps Job and set the Product Binding to Perfect Bound.
2. Select the Part and set these part properties:

Planned Page Count 32

Trim Size 7 x 9 inches

Largest Section 32 pp

Stock 30x40 inches

Press Type Web

WorkStyle Sheetwise

3. In the Products pane, under Part, select Section1 and set these section
properties:

Fold Pattern Select the Custom Fold Pattern saved in Step 1: to create
a sub-section (ribbon) press run.

Fold Flip Yes

Fold Rotation 90

Head/Foot 1/8 inch (0.125)

/Face Trim

Spine 1/8 inch (0.125)

Front/Back 0
Lip

4. Click Generate Press Runs.

5. Select Web 1 Top, and perform these actions:
101
 5.
a. Select all sections except the first section closest to the left edge of
the sheet.
b. Click Delete.
6. Go to Web 2 Top, and perform these actions:
a. Select the second section from the left edge of the sheet and copy it.
b. Go to Web 1 Top and paste.
7. Go to Web 3 Top and perform these actions:
a. Select the third section from the left edge of the sheet and copy it.
b. Go to Web 1 Top and paste.
8. Go to Web 4 Top and perform these actions:
a. Select the fourth section from the left edge of the sheet and copy it.
b. Go to Web 1 Top and paste.
9. For Webs 2, 3, and 4, select the Web in the Press Runs List and use the
Delete key to delete them.

The result is a single Press Run with a single 32-page section and four sub-
sections (ribbons). When you select a section on the sheet, the properties pane
will display Sub-Section Properties and the properties can be controlled/set
independently from the other sub-sections.

Managing press runs

Working with layout sides

In the Press Runs view, edit or check both sides of a sheet or web that uses a two-
sided work style:

102
 To preview a specific surface in the workspace, expand the press run in
the Press Runs List, and select the front or back of a sheet, or the top or
bottom of a web.

To view the next web in the current press run, select it in the drop list at
the top-right corner of the workspace.
To access the other side of the currently displayed layout for editing, click
the Flip tool.
To check back-to-front layout alignment as if using a light table, use the
Transparency slider tool.
To auto-number the pages on the back of a press sheet or bottom of a
web, number the front pages.

Manually adding press runs

You can create a new press run in the Press Runs List by inserting an empty sheet
or web before adding the layout, or by duplicating or copying a press run after
completing its layout.

1. Choose a method:

To insert an empty press run that uses the default stock, select Job > New
Sheet, or press Alt+click the Duplicate Sheet tool in the Press Runs List
toolbar.
To insert a new press run that contains the same layout as the currently
selected press run, without content, click the Duplicate Sheet tool in the
Press Runs List toolbar, or select Job > Duplicate Sheet.
To insert an exact copy of the currently selected press run, with content,
select Edit > Copy and then Edit > Paste. The new press run contains
copies of the layout's content and template pages.
To add a web that duplicates the currently selected web or sheet, select
Job > Web > Insert New Web, or right-click the Duplicate Sheet tool in the
Press Runs List toolbar. Adding a web to a sheetfed press run converts it
to a web press run.
A new press run is inserted in sequence after the selected press run, and its first
sheet side appears in the workspace.

Adding or replacing a press run's stock or media

Add or change the sheet and media size for a press run at any stage of a job.
Follow these steps to manually start up a new press run, or to change a press
run's resources after creating a layout using any of the available methods. New
press runs appear with the default stock.

1. Select the press run in the Press Runs List, or insert a new press run.
You can change the stock and add a media as needed.
2. In the Press Runs List, select the press run.

3. 103
 3. To specify the plate size, double-click an item in the Media list.
A scaled gray rectangle appears in the workspace.
Note: If you do not select a media now, you can select it when you print the
output.
4. To specify the press-sheet size, double-click an item in the Stock list.
A scaled white rectangle appears in the workspace.
Note: If you add a media and a stock, the stock rectangle snaps onto the
media's defined punch location.

Adding marks to a press-run layout

When you add a mark to a press run, it is anchored and positioned automatically
according to its defined properties.

1. In the Marks list, select and double-click marks to add them to the
currently selected press-run layout.
You can add individual marks, mark groups, and selected marks from
within a group to a press-run layout.

The job file references any mark files that it uses. However, if you edit or move a
placed mark so that its properties no longer match a stored SMK file, the mark
data is embedded and stored in the job file.

Ganging
A ganged layout consists of independently positioned pages on a press sheet.
You can rotate, scale, align, group, and step-and-repeat the pages, and edit the
margins and gaps directly in the workspace or in the Properties pane. Ganged
layouts can be manually generated, or you can use the AutoGang feature.

Ganged flat-work layouts

You can arrange independent pages to create ganged layouts that make effective
use of the press runs.
Mixed-size, flat-work products can be ganged on the same press run:

You can step-and-repeat a page to fill a selected area on the press sheet with
duplicates, which is useful for jobs such as business cards.

104
 For nested work, you overlap pages, typically for press sheets that are being
finished with die-cutting. The input files require transparent backgrounds.

You can completely overlay independent pages, resulting in what is traditionally

called a double burn. The final imposed page combines two or more images,
depending on how many pages you overlay.
This technique is useful for products that use the same content on each page plus
additional or changing information.
Depending on the intended use, the input files of the overlaying pages might
require transparent backgrounds.

Manually creating a ganged layout

Ganged pages have no dependency on adjacent pages, and you have full control
over their positioning.
Requirements: On the General tab in the Preferences dialog box, select a snap
option for placing pages.
Note: For gang-only jobs, you add the PDF file pages to the Files list and then
work directly in the Press Runs view. You do not set up a Pages List.

1. Select the pages using any of these methods:

105
 1.

In the Files list, select a PDF file or file placeholder.

Note: If the content files are not yet available, select Job > Add File
Placeholder to add the required number of placeholder pages to the
Files list.
In the Files list, expand a multi-page file to view its list of pages.
Select a single page, or press Shift+click to select multiple pages.
Select a PDF file from an accessible folder in the file directory.
2. For manual ganging, drag the selected pages to a position on the press
sheet.
If you drag the pages to an empty area, the pages cascade onto the
sheet, and you can arrange them.
If you drag a page to a position near an existing page on the sheet,
it snaps into the default snap position that is defined in the
Preferences dialog box.
If you drag the selected pages onto a template page, the first page
is assigned to the template page position, and any additional new
content pages flow through the available template pages in
sequence.
Note: Any existing content on the affected template pages is
replaced.
3. In the Marks list, select and double-click marks to add to the layouts.
4. Select File > Save to save the job.

Step-and-repeat layouts
Use step-and-repeat to quickly fill an area with copies of a page, section, or
placeholder. The objects are automatically grouped, and function as a single
object that can be ungrouped. You can step-and-repeat a page or section by
dragging it across an area. The properties will be updated in the S&R Properties
pane.
To create a step-and-repeat group, use the Step & Repeat tool, or apply advanced
settings in a dialog box. To create a new placeholder element, click the down
arrow next to the Step & Repeat tool. You can save patterns to the step-and-
repeat pattern folder that is accessible from the Layout pane, and you can define
placeholders and sections for different step-and-repeat patterns for packaging
label and flexible bag printers.
When you click the Step & Repeat tool, the Properties pane appears.
Artwork is assigned to a step-and-repeat pattern by dragging a PDF file to
different "hot corners" of the placeholder to fill a single position, row, or
column, or to fill the whole step-and-repeat pattern.
Use the Duplicate dialog box when you need to create a step-and-repeat
group with particular requirements.
For example, you can choose to fill the press sheet with as many repeated
objects that will fit, and whether to flow around existing objects or marks.
You can define default values for Step-and-Repeat settings in Preferences. Click
the Step & Repeat tab, and enter default values for:
106
 Name
Arrange Pages: trim to trim, bleed to bleed, gutters, distance
Placeholder size and position

Step-and-repeat properties
When you select a step-and-repeat tool, the available properties to define or edit
your pattern are displayed in the Step & Repeat Properties pane. As you make
changes to the properties, the changes are automatically applied to the Press
Runs view.

Name
The default step-and-repeat name is displayed. You can rename the step-and-
repeat pattern.

Step & Repeat Element

The option that appears depends on the action you have taken. You can select or
update the element from the drop-down menu:
File—a list of the available files and their pages; <filename>, <page
number>, <pdf>
Section—a list of the available intent sections; <product>, <section
number>
Placeholder

Size
The size of the step-and-repeat element is shown in width and height.

Repeat
The repeat of the step-and-repeat pattern, as defined by the number of rows and
columns

Arrange Pages
Trim to trim—the pages are placed from trim edge to trim edge
Bleed to bleed—the pages are placed from bleed edge to bleed edge
Gutters—lets you define the horizontal and vertical gaps between the
pages
Distance—lets you define the horizontal and vertical offset parameters

Stagger Type
None
Staircase up

107
 Staircase down
Castletop - 1st lane up
Castletop - 1st lane down

Stagger Amount
You can define the offset (or stagger amount) by selecting a fraction of the page
height or by entering custom value.
Default
1/4
1/3
1/2
Custom—lets you define the required amount

Save As
An option that lets you save a pattern for reuse. Completing the dialog will save
the pattern to your Step & Repeat patterns in Resources > Layout.

Working with ganged page groups

Ganged page groups are treated as single objects.
Requirements: Use these tasks to organize ganged pages into groups after adding
them to a press run.
Choose a task:

Group Drag a marquee to select the pages, and click the Group tool.
selected
pages in their
current
position

Group
1. a. Select a reference page for the group.
selected
pages and b. Optional: Lock the page to its position on the
apply uniform sheet, in the template page properties.
gutters c. Drag a marquee to select the pages.
d. Edit the reference page gutter text boxes.
e. Click the Group tool.

The same gutters are applied throughout the group.

Break a group Select the group and click the Ungroup tool.
apart

108
Step-and- Choose a method:
repeat a
Basic: With the page selected, click the Step & Repeat
selected page
tool, select how the repeated pages are to be
or group
separated, and drag the page to the opposite corner or
side of the area.
Advanced: Select Edit > Duplicate, and set the options
that appear.

Replace a Drag the new content page to the target page position, and
content page release the mouse when the recycle symbol appears. All
within a group same-numbered template pages are updated with the new
content.
To replace one content page without updating all the other
same-numbered pages, use Option/Alt + drag.

Edit gutters in
1. a. Click the Ungroup tool.
a selected
group b. While the ungrouped pages remain selected,
edit one page's gutter text boxes. The same
gutters are applied throughout the group.
c. Click the Group tool to regroup the pages.

Access the Select the group, and in the Properties or workspace, make
properties of any required edits. Unedited settings for individual pages are
all pages in a not affected.
group

Rotate a page Select the page and click Rotate. Rotating a group rotates the
group entire group as if it were one object:

Rotate one
1. a. Ungroup the pages.
page in a
group b. Click elsewhere so that the pages are no longer
selected.
If you apply rotation while all the pages are
selected, page overlap will result:

109
 b.

c. Select the page, then click Rotate.

d. Edit the gutters if necessary.
e. Regroup the pages.

View the Select View > Show Page Sizes, and select the group.
dimensions of
a group

View the page Select View > Show Group Count.

counts of
groups

A dashed line forms a blue rectangle around grouped pages.

Setting gutters between ganged page rows

1. Select a page to use as the reference for the pages for which you want to
set common gutters.
2. Optional: Lock the page into position.
3. Drag a marquee around all of the pages that you want to arrange in a
uniform layout, including the page that you will use as reference.
4. To set the vertical and horizontal gutters for all of the selected pages, edit
the reference page's gutter text boxes.
For example, if you are using the lower-left page as the reference, you will
edit its top and right gutters.

Removing a ganged page from a press run

To remove a content page with its template page, select the content page
and press Delete.
To remove a template page that has no content, select the template page
and press Delete.
To remove a content page without removing its template page, use
Command/Ctrl + Delete.
Note: Removing a template page that has content on the other side, also
removes both content pages from the layout.

5
110
5 Assembly view

The Assembly view gives experienced prepress operators or planners a visual and
efficient way of planning a complex product's sections before creating the press
runs. You can define or edit product intent, compare your settings with any JDF-
specified values, and use drag-and-drop or manual editing to make adjustments.

Product intent and assembly planning

Start a product assembly by entering the available product intent that describes
the customer's product requirements, or by opening a JDF file that pre-populates
this information.
The Assembly view provides access to all the information and settings that you
need for planning a job's product assemblies:

Use this: To view or edit this:

Product The job information and product intent for the first product in a
Intent job
dialog box

Assembly The assembly of each product's parts and sections in graphic or

workspace list format, with visual indicators for items that require your input

Products The basic structural components, with visual indicators for items
list that need to be added to a press run

Properties The detailed settings for a selected item, with visual indicators for
pane settings that require your input. For JDF-based jobs, you can
expand this pane to compare your settings with the original JDF
requirements.

You can also access product intent from other views:

In all views, you can view the basic structural components in the Products
list.
In the Press Runs view, you can edit any of the press-run section
properties that are linked to the corresponding product section's intent,
such as the stock, fold pattern, or colors.
Notes:
Other details that you add in the Press Runs view, such as marks and
content page adjustments, have no relationship with product intent.

111
 To make significant structural changes, such as increasing or decreasing a
product's total page count, you must edit the product assembly.

For basic jobs that do not consist of multiple products, parts, or binding
styles, you can ignore product intent and work entirely in the Press Runs
view, using Pages view when needed.
If you reopen a job that was created in an older version of the software
that did not support multiple products and parts per job, then that entire
job is treated as a single product with a single part.
Product parts
You can plan the following part types for a product assembly:
Cover: The outermost part of a bound product. You typically choose a
standard fold pattern for covers, depending on the binding type.
Text: The body part of a bound product, consisting of sections that will be
perfect-bound or saddle-stitched along the spine
Flat work: A single-section part that consists of only one front and (for
two-sided work) one back template page, with no anticipated folding or
binding.

Preparing a job assembly

You typically start planning a new product assembly when you receive the job
ticket from an estimator or the MIS.
Note: Access to the Assembly view and the Products list is license-dependent.
This also applies to the corresponding ability to work with multiple products,
parts, and binding styles in a job.

Adding a product via the Products pane

From the Press Runs or Assembly view, you can use the Products pane to quickly
add products and parts for new jobs or in-progress assembly jobs. New jobs
always contain one default product.

1. In the Products list, right-click a product, and select New Product.

2. Select the new product that appears in the list.
The Properties pane displays the settings for this item.
3. Switch to the Properties pane to define the details:
a. Rename the product, as needed.
b. Specify the Product Type: Commercial Print or Packaging.
c. Provide values for other properties, as required.
4. In the Products list, right-click the product and select New Part.
5. Select the new part that appears in the list.
The Properties pane displays the settings for this item.
6. In the Properties pane, define the details:
112
 6.
a. Rename the part (as needed).
b. Select its Part Type.
c. Specify the total Planned Page/Artwork Count.
d. Specify the number of pages that are to be in its Largest Section.
(The Largest Section will only appear in commercial print products.)
e. Provide values for the other properties (as required).
The part name in the Products list is updated to show the page
count, and the part now contains its list of sections.
7. Repeat as needed, to add parts and products.

Starting an assembly job with product intent

Set up the assembly for the first product in a multi-product job by entering the
available intent details in a single dialog box.
Requirements: This procedure assumes that the necessary resources are already
configured.
Product intent information is shared between the Product Intent dialog box, the
Products pane, the Assembly workspace, and the Properties pane for a selected
product component.
Note: Only one job can be open at a time.

1. Select File > New Job With Product Intent.

2. In the Product Intent dialog box, provide the product details, and select the
Product Type: Commercial Print or Packaging. Make selections, as needed,
from the menus.
3. (Optional) In the Comments box, type a reminder that you (or other
operators) can review and edit in the Properties pane for this item.
4. On the Parts Intent pane, define the part assembly requirements for each
part in this product:
a. To add a part, click [+].
A new expanded tab of blank properties appears, labeled with the
default name for the part.
b. Rename the part, select its Part Type, specify its Planned Page
/Artwork Count, and provide values for the other properties. (After
you close this dialog box, you can edit or provide missing values
using the Properties pane.)
c. Repeat as needed to define all the parts for the product.
You can click the tabs in the Parts Intent pane to toggle between
multiple parts.
5. When you finish defining the product parts, click OK to close the dialog
box.
6. If additional products are required for this job, select File > Add New
Product Intent, and repeat the steps above (as needed).

7. 113
 7. If you need to define more parts after you close the Product Intent dialog
box, you can click [+] in the Parts area of the product's Properties pane.

The product structure appears in the Products list and workspace.

You can continue to refine the assembly, until you are ready to generate the press
runs.

Managing product assemblies

Based on the product intent and the bindery's requirements for a product,
organize the product assembly in the Assembly workspace.
Requirements: You already defined the intent for one product and now need to
make changes.
Choose your tasks:
Note: Although there are typically multiple ways to perform a task, this table
describes only one way of performing each task. For example, you can manipulate
an object in the workspace or edit its settings in the Properties pane to
immediately update both.

Task Description

Edit product In the workspace, select the product section, and in the
section Properties pane, edit its settings as needed.
properties

Edit part In the Products list, select the product, and in the Properties
properties pane, rename it and edit its settings as needed.

Rearrange and In the workspace, drag the sections into the desired
renumber sequence.
sections

Change a In the workspace, drag a section to visually change its binding

section's relationship to another section in the part.
binding style in
For perfect binding, drop one section directly under or
relation to
above, and left-align with another section so that they
other sections
appear stacked.
in a part
For saddle-stitched binding, drop one section at the
right side of another section, so that a connecting line
indicates a nested relationship.

Combine In the workspace, drag one section directly onto another

sections into a section.
single section

114
Task Description

Add sections In the Products list, click the part, and in the Properties pane,
and pages to a edit its page count. The required number of additional
part sections appear in the workspace and in the Products list,
based on the part's default binding style and largest section
size.

Edit a In the Products list, click the product, and in the Properties
product's page pane, edit its page count. Sections are automatically added or
count removed as needed, that you can adjust as needed.

Add parts to a In the Products list, click the product, and in the Properties
product pane in the Parts area, click [+] to add parts to the list.
Double-click a part in the list to display its settings.

Split a section
1. a. In the workspace, select the section, and click

the Split Section tool.

b. Specify the number of sections to create from
the selected section, and click [+].
A list appears with the sections and page counts
that can be created to total the original page
count.
When all pages are accounted for, a running
tally indicates that zero pages remain to be
placed.
c. If you prefer to split the section differently, edit
the results by overtyping the page counts for
each section. You can type a page count into the
extra placeholder to increase the number of
sections in the split.
d. When you are satisfied with the distribution of
the pages, click OK.
The new sections appear in the workspace,
replacing the original section.
e. Drag the sections as needed to define the
sequence and binding styles.

Delete a part In the Products list or workspace, click the part or section,
or section and press Delete. To avoid an error condition, also edit the
product's page count.

Add a product Select File > Add New Product Intent, and provide the details.

115
 Task Description

Edit a Edit a product's initial properties using the Product Intent

product's dialog box. This sets the default values for any parts and
properties sections that you might later add.
To edit an existing product, select the product in the Products
list to display its settings in the Properties pane.
After you close the Product Intent dialog box, you can edit
only the the product name, job ID, customer name, due date,
and comments, and you can add and delete parts. The
remaining values are read-only and reflect the sum total of
the parts and sections.

The section properties and page ranges are automatically updated in all
applicable panes when you change the section binding styles, page counts, and
sequential position within the part.

Using drag and drop to edit an assembly

You can edit the binding styles and section sequence using your drag and drop.
Requirements: Define the product intent, and view it in the Assembly workspace.
After selecting a task in the Assembly view, perform one of the following tasks.

Change the section sequence or binding type

As you drag, a guideline and wireframe section box indicates the nearest drop
point. For example, drag a saddle-stitched section to the left to convert it to a
perfect-bound section:

Create a part with mixed binding styles

In this example, one section is saddle-stitched to another, and the resulting
booklet is perfect bound to the third section.

116
 The Binding Style in the Properties pane for section 1 will display a value of
Mixed, and the page range is dynamically updated.

Combine two sections and their page counts

Dragging a section onto another section creates one merged section—drop the
dragged section when the target section becomes highlighted:

The section properties and page ranges are automatically updated in all applicable
panes when you change the section binding styles, page counts, and sequential
position within the part.

Generating an assembly's press-run layouts

After defining a product assembly, you can trigger automatic generation of the
press-run layouts.

1. In the Assembly view, ensure that the product is fully defined and that the
product sections have a fold pattern selected. (You can also select the
sections from the Products pane.)
Note: If it is only partially defined, do not use this procedure. Instead, you
can manually finish defining its parts and sections and creating the press-
run layouts in the Press Runs view.
2. Select the product in the workspace or Products list.
Note: In Preps software, version 7.0, you can set the Work Style,
placement position of the imposition, and the horizontal or vertical gaps
before you click Generate Press Runs.
3. Click Generate Press Runs.
If the press-run layouts are successfully generated, the view switches to
the Press Runs view. If they fail to be generated, you can edit the settings
and try again, or switch to Press Runs view and manually complete the job.

Next: In the Press Runs view, check and adjust the generated press-run layouts
and trims as needed, and print the output.

Assembly view reference

As you define and edit an assembly's properties in the Product Intent dialog box,
Assembly workspace, Properties pane, and Products list, the corresponding
settings are updated in all of these areas.

117
Products list
The Products list maintains a summary of the job's products, parts, and sections.
You can select a component to display its settings in the Properties pane. When
manually building press runs, you can drag the product sections from this pane to
create press-run sections.
Note: You can right-click any item in the Products list to access a context menu
for adding products and parts.

Product and part details

Collapse and expand your view of products as needed. The following information
about each product is displayed and updated as you make changes:
Product: Color-coding, name, planned page count
Part: Color coding, name, page count
Sections: Color coding, number, section page count

Assembly workspace
In the Assembly workspace, you can toggle your view of each product's assembly
between a graphical format and a compact list format. You can drag sections to
rearrange or merge them or to change their binding styles.

Split Section tool

This tool displays the Split dialog box. Specify the number of sections to
create from the selected section, and click [+].

Pan

Drag your view of the workspace.

Toggle product view

or Switch between viewing a product in a graphical format or a
compact list format.

Color coding
A unique color code identifies the corresponding products in the Products list and
the Assembly workspace.

Product and part details

Collapse and expand your view of products as needed. The following information
about each product is displayed and updated as you make changes:
Product: Color-coding, name, planned page count, page size
Part: Color coding, name, page count, planned colors, page range

118
 Sections: Color coding, number, part name, section page count, planned
colors, page range

Visual information
The arrangement of the sections indicates the binding type:

Saddle-stitched sections:

In list format, smaller icons are used:

Perfect-bound sections:

Generate Press Runs

The required number of press runs and impositions is automatically generated,
and the run-list pages flow into position according to the template page
numbering.

Product properties (assembly intent)

Product Name
Use or edit the default name.

Job ID
(Optional) Blank by default; accepts alphabetic characters and numbers

Due Date
This information is currently for your reference only.

Planned Page Count

The product page count, which is initially specified in the product intent, can be
updated only by changing the part page counts.

Binding Style
Determines the sequence in which content pages flow through the template
pages on the press-run layouts:
Flat Work (no binding)
Perfect Bound
Saddle Stitched

119
 Come and Go
Cut and Stack
Mixed (more than one binding style)

Planned Colors
Select a predefined common color resource, or type a new descriptor as a
placeholder for the actual color.

Comments
Type a note that you or other operators can review and edit.

Parts
Click [+] to add as many parts as needed, which derive their default properties
from the product.
To display a part and its properties, double-click the part name.

Generate Press Runs

The required number of press runs and impositions is automatically generated,
and the run-list pages flow into position according to the template page
numbering.

Part properties (assembly intent)

Part Name
Use or edit the default name.

Part Type
Can be Cover, Text, or Flat Work

Planned Page Count

The number of pages that you expect this part to contain

Trim Size
The planned width and height of the printed product page, after it is bound and
trimmed. The default dimensions are defined on the General tab in the
Preferences dialog box.

Binding Style
Determines the sequence in which content pages flow through the template
pages on the press-run layouts:
Flat Work (no binding)

120
 Perfect Bound
Saddle Stitched
Come and Go
Cut and Stack
Mixed (more than one binding style)

Largest Section
The highest number of pages that will be in the page grid of the largest section.
This value filters the fold pattern list and determines the product sections that are
created, based on the part's page count.

Planned Colors
Select a predefined common color resource, or type a new descriptor as a
placeholder for the actual color.

Stock
When you select a stock resource from this list, its defined press-sheet
dimensions are also displayed.

Product section properties

Select a section in the Products list or workspace to display its settings in the
Properties pane.
The Part Name, Part Type, and Binding Style are derived from the part properties.
The ability to edit properties can also depend on whether you are viewing a press-
run section in the Press Runs view or a product section in the Assembly view, and
whether you create the imposition in the section from a fold pattern or sheet-
based imposition.

Part Name
Use or edit the default name.

Part Type
Can be Cover, Text, or Flat Work

Section
The number that determines the binding order of the product sections. If the
product sections are rearranged in the workspace, the section numbers are
automatically adjusted to reflect the new sequence.

Lock
Select this check box to prevent this product section from being rearranged
within the assembly.

121
First Page Number
Determines the starting page and range of run-list pages that will be printed in
this section, based on its page count

Trim Size
The planned width and height of the printed product page, after it is bound and
trimmed. The default dimensions are defined on the General tab in the
Preferences dialog box.

Template Name
If a template was used to build this press run, displays the template name.
Otherwise, a default Untitled name is assigned, with a number that increments
for each existing Untitled template in the Templates list. If you save the current
job as a template, the new name is displayed.

Page Count
The number of pages in this component

Fold Pattern
Select from the filtered list of fold patterns that match the section page count, or
click Browse for fold pattern to display the Fold Pattern dialog box.

Binding Style
The style that determines the sequence in which the run-list pages flow through
the template pages on the press-run layouts

Reference Page
Applies only to sheet-based impositions that you create or add from a template.
Select the orientation of the section's lower-left page, which serves as the
reference for the other pages in this section.

Lay out additional page

Applies only to sheet-based impositions that you create or add from a template.
Select the orientation of the other pages in this section, relative to each other,
based on the reference page.
The following properties can be edited only in the Press Runs view:

Fold Flip
Select Yes to flip the fold pattern.

122
 Fold Rotation
Set the degree of rotation relative to the sheet's grip edge. Select one of the
available rotations or select Optimize to allow Preps to calculate the best fit.

Bind Edge
Experienced users can apply flip and rotate transformations to change the
orientation of the pages relative to the binding edge. For more details, see the
CIP4 Pagination Catalog, available at http://www.cip4.org/.

Head Trim, Foot Trim, Face Trim, Spine, Front Lip, Back Lip
The applicable gutter or margin widths that will be trimmed from the page edges.
This applies only to impositions that are based on a fold pattern and is editable
after you select a Fold Pattern.
In addition to setting individual trim margins, you can set a spine width (for the
backbone of a book cover) and lip widths (for example, to create overfold edges
on the front or back page of the folded signature).

Planned Colors
Select or type the names of the colors that are planned for this item.

Colors
Displays the actual content colors that are defined in the PDF input files (not
editable).
Note: Use the Pages view to check for discrepancies between planned and actual
colors.

Comments
Type a note that you or other operators can review and edit.

6
123
6 Output printing

When you print a job, you generate the output files that contain the job's layout
and imaging data, or you can print directly to a connected device. A job's output
can target multiple media resources and can be split by component type.

High level steps for printing the output

When you print the output, you provide basic information, such as the print
range. You can also set up advanced options for color mapping and web growth
compensation.

1. (Optional) In the Preferences dialog box, load a suitable profile or set

options as needed on the Output tab.
You can set default values for:
Output type (Printer, PDF, PS, JDF, PJTF, or PPF)
CIP3/PPF (Generate multi-page cut blocks, CIP3 units)
JDF (Include JDF folding data, Include HTML file with JDF output
for WST equipment setup)
PDF (Split File Name)
Display punch mark
Print side center marks
Ignore split file output errors
Print crop marks for bleed bounds
Auto rotate for best fit
Center image on media
Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF
Scale shingled pages (Proportionally or Anamorphically)
Shingle crop marks
Remove crop marks when exceeding the center of gutters
Skip device warning
2. Select File > Print.
3. In the Send to list in the Print dialog box, select the output file type or
Printer.
4. Accept or change the Media.
Any change that you make to the media selection applies to the entire
output.
5. Set up other print options on the dialog box tabs as needed.

6. 124
 6. Click Print.
7. If you are printing divided output and the Print File ID dialog box appears,
type an identifier to include in each file name, and click OK.
8. If printing to file, specify a file name and folder location for the output.
If you generate divided output for media configurations that are set up with
divided output paths, the files are placed in those folders and you cannot
redirect the output.

Printing job layout reports

You can print layout mockups and press-run summaries in a report to use as a
reference, or provide to another operator. The report includes a mock-up of and
details about each press run, including press run ID and sheet or web number,
sheet size and utilization, run length, and color separation names.

1. Select File > Print Job Layout Report, or use the keyboard shortcut Shift +
CMD/Ctrl + P.
Note: The sheet diagram shows the layout dimensions including gutters,
such as head trim, foot trim, face trim, spine, and lip values (as applicable).
2. In the Send to list, select the output type (typically PDF or Printer).
3. In the Job Report Media list, select the media size.
Note: Selecting Generic PostScript Printer applies the printer's default page
size.
4. In Media, select the media to use for the diagram.
By default it will select the media selected for each Press Run. You can
override this selection and choose Press Sheet Size to exclude device
media size from the diagram.
5. Under the Layout tab, set these options.

Job Press The number of diagram surfaces per page

Layouts
Per Page

Press From Final Trim will show sheet margin values. The
Sheet distance from the trimmed down imposition to the sheet
Margins edges. From Final Lip will only show the sheet margins from
the imposition Lip.

Show Press Run Media will display media dimensions

Output Show Side Guide

Options
Show Gripper

Override Gripper Label (text label for gripper position)

125
 Output Product
Comments
Part

Section

6. Under the Marks tab, set these options.

Print Job Layout Prints only marks placed on Press Runs that have the
Report Marks Only on Job Layout Report option selected

Print All Marks Prints all marks that are placed on Press Runs

Page Based Select whether to print all or selected page-based

Marks layout report marks

Press Sheet Select whether to print all or selected press sheet

Marks based layout report marks

7. Click Print.

Output Preferences
The output settings that are defined in the currently loaded profile are applied by
default when you print a job.
Use a custom profile to store and load specific print settings that you define on
the Output tab in the Preferences dialog box.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > Output.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > Output.

Defaults

Default Output Type

Printer: Prints to the printer that is selected in the Connection dialog box.
Divided output is not available.
PDF: Generates one or more PDF output files
PS: Generates one or more PostScript files
JDF: Generates a Job Definition Format file
PJTF: Generates an Adobe Job Ticket file for workflows that require
Portable Job Ticket Format job data
PPF: Generates one Print Production Format cutting-data file per press
sheet

126
CIP3/PPF

Generate multipage cut blocks

Selecting this check box configures the cutting data in the PPF output to correctly
handle adjoining cut blocks for perfect-bound and saddle-stitched impositions.

CIP3 units
Select the measurement unit that is required by the cutting equipment.

Enable PPF Output

When a PPF output path is set in Preferences > Folders, the Enable PPF Output
setting enables automatic PPF output when the imposition is printed.

JDF

Include JDF folding data

Forwards the CIP4 folding data that is received in a qualified MIS JDF job file, for
the setup of CIP4-compliant folding equipment

Include HTML file with JDF output for WST equipment setup
For automation of Wafer Systems Technology (WST) equipment only. Select this
check box to add HTML postpress information to a JDFMarksFlats subfolder
in the output folder.
Notes:
The job notes must include JobID and JobName values.
The Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF preference must be enabled.
The press-run layouts must include WST bar code marks (PDF for
working on the layouts, PS for output).

PDF

Split File Name

Generates divided output file names according to the format that you specify.
You can include literal text and file-name variables.
Use {} curly brackets to enclose the variable name followed by its limits,
which are enclosed in angle brackets (< >). The variable names must not
contain spaces, although any spaces that exist in the substituted value or
any literal text are maintained.
Use angle brackets (< >) to indicate how many characters will represent
the value. For example, <3> uses 3 characters, so a value of "2" will
appear as 002.
Use square brackets ([ ]) to enclose any text that is to appear "as is".
127
 The following list of available variables shows the maximum number of software
characters (in the angle brackets) that you can edit.
Up to the first 19 characters of the job's identifier (including spaces) can
be used. Choose a variable:
{PrintID<19>} derives the value from the Print File ID dialog box.
{JobName<19>} derives the value from the job's file name and
includes the .job or .jdf extension, except when it is saved
without an extension in Mac OS.
{JobID<19>} derives the value from the job notes.
Note: If you include JobName instead of PrintID and are printing
divided PDF output to a network folder, ensure that the folder and
contents are correctly set up with read and write privileges for
Group and Other.
{Device<19>}, derived from the Media resource for the press run
{Sig<3>}, derived from the Press Run ID in the job's Press Runs List
{Side<2>}. The value will be:
All sides: the number 0
Separated sides: a letter incrementing from A to Z
{XTile<1>}{YTile<1>}. The following numbers identify the tiles:
All tiles: Number 0
Selected X tiles: Numbers incrementing from 1 to 9
Selected Y tiles: Letters incrementing from A to Z
[FileNameExtension]. Use literal text to specify the file type. For multiple
output types, [.m] is used.
{ColorNum<2>}. The following numbers identify the separations:
Process colors: The numbers 00 to 04 (00=multiple colors,
01=cyan, 02=magenta, 03=yellow, 04=black)
Spot colors: The numbers 05 to 98, according to the list on the
Color Separations tab in the Print dialog box
Composite: The number 99
Note: Remember to reduce the size of the other variables if
needed.

General
Display punch mark
Print side center marks
Ignore split file output errors: Prevents an error from interrupting a divided
(split file) output operation. You can check the Status or Job Log window
for output error information.
Print crop marks for bleed bounds

128
 Auto rotate for best fit
Center image on media
Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF: For advanced users. Select this check
box if you have special production marks that are written in PostScript and
must be included with PJTF or JDF output. Note: A PDF version of each
PostScript mark is required for building the layouts and editing the SMK
properties.
Scale shingled pages: Choose the default scaling type.
Proportionally: Retains the vertical and horizontal aspect ratio
Anamorphically (Horizontally): Changes the vertical and horizontal
ratios
Shingle crop marks: Shifts the crop marks along with pages that are
shingled for creep
Remove crop marks when exceeding the center of gutters
Skip device warning: Suppresses the message that appears when the
selected media is smaller than the stock, such as when tiling

Common Print options

Select File > Print. The following options appear on every tab of the Print dialog
box.

Send to
Lists all available output types, and displays the current output type. You can
select a different output type each time you print.
Printer: Prints to the printer that is selected in the Connection dialog box.
Divided output is not available.
PDF: Generates one or more PDF output files
PS: Generates one or more PostScript files
JDF: Generates a Job Definition Format file
PJTF: Generates an Adobe Job Ticket file for workflows that require
Portable Job Ticket Format job data
PPF: Generates one Print Production Format cutting-data file per press
sheet

The default type is defined on the Output tab in the Preferences dialog
box.

Copies
Specify the number of copies to be printed.

129
Comment text
Type text or text-mark variables to build the $Comment text mark for this job.

Media
Lists all available media resources, including any tile sets that you create, and
displays the job's media selection. The default media is Press Sheet Size. If
Multiple appears, then the output targets more than one media size and will be
imaged by one or more devices:
Changing this setting applies the selection to the entire output.
The lowest supported capabilities apply to the entire output.
One JDF, PJTF, or PDF output file contains the separate media information
for each press sheet.
JDF or PJTF output also includes a separate marks flat per media.
PDF output generates a single file that contains the different media sizes,
and only the applicable press runs are printed by each device. (To send
separate files, you can use divided output.)
PS output generates a separate file for each media. Sequentially numbered
press runs that target the same media are output in a single file.
Nonsequential press runs are output as separate files in the correct
sequence.
The output file names include the media name and a sequential numeric identifier.
Note: To successfully generate PS output with multiple media to an AFP share
location, limit the file name to 31 characters.

Connection
Displays the connected printer that is currently selected in the Connection dialog
box for the target media. This option only appears if Printer is selected in the
Send to box. It is not displayed for multiple media.

Print
Sends the output to the Send to selection. The default output path is defined on
the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box. If the Print ID dialog box appears,
type an identifier that is appended to the file name of each output file generated.
The maximum number of characters for the Split File Name is defined on the
Preferences Output tab. If the Print ID dialog box does not appear, it indicates
that the split file name format in Preferences uses a different identifier.

General Print options

Use the General tab in the Print dialog box to set up the basic output
requirements.
Select File > Print > General.

130
Specify print range
Select this check box to print a partial job.
Use a dash to indicate a range, and use a comma to separate multiple values (1-
4,9-12,21-24). Do not insert spaces.

Output Format, Divide by

For PS or PDF output, specify the components by which to divide a job's output. A
separate file is generated for each component of that type.
Optionally, use this setting in conjunction with a print range.
Set up to 999 divisions for a job, with multiple output files generated per
division.
Without divided output, full jobs are printed by default, and if a problem is
encountered, printing stops.
With divided output, printing skips a problem file and goes to the next
component file.
Divided output files can be automatically placed into media-specific target
folders that you define in the Media Configuration dialog box.
Divided output is not available for JDF, PJTF, or PPF output.
The split file name format for divided output is defined on the Output tab in the
Preferences dialog box.

Color Handling
None: Passes any color information through "as-is".
PDF Color mapping: Activates the Color Separations tab.
If you print to PDF output, the RIP derives the color mapping information
from the composite PDF output files.
You can set up PS or Printer color-mapped output and print to PostScript
devices that support in-RIP separations.
Or, after setting up the mappings, switch the output type to PDF and
generate color-mapped composite PDF output files.

Emulsion side down

Prints the job with the emulsion side down. The media device setting can override
this setting.

Embed CIP3 cutting data

Adds the CIP3 cutting data to PJTF or JDF output files

131
Color separations setup
After enabling color mapping on the Print General tab, define the ink colors for
each plate on the Color Separations tab. For example, you can map a spot color to
print on its process equivalent plates or another spot color.

Setting up the color separations

1. Select File > Print.
2. On the General tab in the Print dialog box, select PDF Color Mapping to
activate the options on the Color Separation tab.
3. Click the Color Separations tab.
4. In the Color column lists, select the colors that will print on their own
separations.
5. Ensure that all required spot colors are in the job's color list and, if needed,
are defined with suitable process builds.
6. Specify how any spot colors are to print:
To print a spot color on its own separation, select the spot color's
check box and its own color name in the color's Output As list. If
the spot color is not yet on the list, you can add it.
To print a spot color with its process equivalents, select Process
Colors in the color's Output As list and select the spot color's check
box. The spot color is printed on CMYK separations according to its
defined process build.
To print a spot color with a specific separation, select the process
color separation in the spot color's Output As list.
To print all spot colors as their process equivalents, click All Spots
as Process.
To reset all the spot colors to print separately when the output
settings for the spot colors are varied, click All Spots Separately.
7. Change the Overprint/Knockout settings, if needed for any
SSiCustomColor separations.
8. Change the Line Screen and Screen Angle settings, if needed.

Defining a spot color's process equivalent

To define the process build for a spot color, specify the required CMYK color
percentages.

1. On the Color Separations tab in the Print dialog box, click Build next to the
color that you want to define or redefine in a process build.
The Defined build CMYK percentages are derived from the input file and
updated as you make changes.

2. 132
 2. In the Process Build dialog box, specify the New Build percentages.
The Use new build check box is automatically selected, and the Defined
build percentages are updated as soon as you type a new value.
3. To save the build, ensure that the check box is selected before closing the
dialog box.
You can change the values as often as needed by clearing this check box to
revert to the previous build.
4. To map the spot color to the corresponding process color separations in
the output, on the Color Separations tab in the Print dialog box, select
Process Colors in the spot color's Output As column.

Adding a spot color to a job's color list

1. On the Color Separations tab in the Print dialog box, click Add Color.
2. Type the exact name of the color as identified in the originating
specification, with identical capitalization and spelling.
The new spot color appears in the Color list. If this color will print on its
own separation, skip step 3.
3. If you need to map the new spot color to process colors, click Build, and
specify the New Build percentages.

Color Separations Print options

Select File > Print, select a media and output type that support color handling,
select PDF color mapping, and click the Color Separations tab.

Option Description

Color list Lists all the colors in the output, including CMYK process colors,
and check spot colors, and mark SSiCustomColors.
boxes All process and spot colors print by default.
In JDF output, to prevent unexpected results with spot colors that
are set in the input files to overprint, turn spot colors off.

Output As Indicates the color separation on which to print all of the page
content that uses the selected color. Each process color and each
spot color maps by default to its own separation.
To map the color to another color separation, select the color in
the Output As list. To map a spot color to its process equivalents,
select Process Colors.

Overprint Derived from the PDF input files; cannot be changed.

/Knockout SSiCustomColors in marks are set by default to pass through as
overprint.

133
Option Description

Pass through
Retains the input file settings for the selected color. By default, all
colors are set to pass through without overprinting or knocking
out.

Overprint
Use with care. Prints the selected color on top of other colors, and
can result in a totally different color.

Knockout
Use with care. Knocks out a space for the selected color on the
other separations, and retains its original color.

Line You can apply one line screen to each color separation. For
Screen mapped spot colors, the line screens for each of the process colors
apply.

Screen When you use a line screen that is not defined in a PPD or PPX file,
Angle screen angles of 15, 75, 90, and 45 are assigned by default to cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black, respectively. If you change the line
screen for a selected color, the screen angle remains the same
unless you change it.

Add Color Define a missing color when a spot color used in a job fails to
appear in the color list.

Build Displays the Process Build dialog box for this spot color.

All Colors Click All Colors On to select all the color check boxes. Click All
On/Off Colors Off to clear all the color check boxes.

All Spots To map spot colors simultaneously:

as
Click All Spots as Process to change all spot colors to their
Process /
process equivalents.
Separately
Click All Spots Separately to change all spot colors to
"output as" their own separate plate.

134
Web growth
Web growth occurs when large rolls of thin or lower quality paper, such as
newsprint, run through the color units of a web press. Use the Print Web Growth
tab to compensate by scaling the color separations.
Note: Web growth settings applied to a Preps job are ignored when the job is
brought into a Prinergy workflow.

Scaling to compensate for web growth

Define reusable scaling sets that compensate for stretch at each of the ink units
on particular web presses. When printing jobs, you can select and apply or edit a
scaling set as needed.
The amount by which the paper stretches varies for each ink unit, depending on
the water and ink that the paper absorbs, and the tension that is applied to the
paper as it runs through each ink unit.
A print shop typically knows what percentage of stretch occurs at each unit. If
they don't know the exact percentages, they can easily run a test job through the
press and measure the stretch percentage for each unit.
To define web-growth compensation scaling sets, you must have an advanced
understanding of web-press concepts and behaviors. To manage the scaling sets,
you can:
Add, edit, and store reusable scaling sets as needed
Edit an existing scaling set for a specific job
Duplicate and edit an existing set to create a new set
You can optionally set up a central folder for compensation scaling sets, and set
the path on the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box at each installation that
uses this folder.
Note: Changes that a user makes at one installation are not reflected at another
installation until the other installation's Web Growth Compensation Sets window
is closed and reopened.

Applying a scaling set to job output

1. Select File > Print > General.
2. Select PDF Color Mapping.
3. Set up the Color Separations tab.
4. On the Web Growth tab, select Compensate for Web Growth.
5. The first time that you use this feature, a message asks you to locate (and
create, if necessary) the scaling sets folder.
6. On the Web Growth tab, select a scaling set from the Compensation Set
list.
The number of ink units for the selected set appear below your selection.
135
 7. Select a scaling set to use, or select a set that is somewhat but not
completely correct for the job.
To create a new set from a copy of the selected set, click Duplicate
and Edit.
To edit the selected set, click Edit This Set.
8. Click Print to generate the output.

Your changes are applied to this job's output. Sets that you create are stored for
reuse.

Web Growth Print options

Select File > Print > Web Growth.

Option Description

Compensate Select to activate the web-growth compensation options.

for Web
Growth

Compensation Select a set from the alphabetical list of sets that are defined.
Set list

Set type, Ink When you select a set from the list, the type (Scaling) and the
Units number of ink units that are defined for the set are shown.

Color to Ink Unit Mapping

Printing Colors All job colors are listed, including any spot colors that are
printing separately.

Ink Unit A default ink unit identifier is listed for each color, where 1 is
the first color that will be printed, 2 is the second, and so on. If
needed, you can edit these numbers to remap the colors to
the actual ink units in the correct sequence.

Creating and managing the scaling sets

When you define a scaling set, you need to know the press orientation, the
sequence of the ink units, and the percentage by which the press will stretch the
paper at each unit. You can define as many different scaling sets as you need.

1. Select Resources > Web Growth Compensation Sets.

2. 136
 2. Locate and open the compensation sets file.
The first time that you use this feature, a message asks you to locate the
scaling sets folder (and create if necessary). The location appears on the
Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box after you restart the software.

3. In the Web Growth Compensation Sets window, choose a task:

To add a new set, click Scaling Set.
Map the ink colors to the press units and apply a scaling percentage
to each ink color, which resizes the images appropriately for each
color
To modify only the scaling percentages in a scaling set, select the
set and click Edit.
To create and edit a copy of a scaling set, select the set and click
Copy.
To delete a scaling set, select the set and click Delete.
4. If applicable, edit the options in the dialog box that appears:
If adding a new set, type a name for the scaling set, and specify the
Number of ink units, the Sheet width, and the Reference ink unit,
and click Create.
If editing a set, enter the scaling percentage to apply to each ink
unit, and click OK.

Web Growth Compensation Sets window

Select Resources > Web Growth Compensation Sets.

Option Description

Table You can click a column header to change the sort order. This does not
of affect the alphabetical sort order of scaling sets on the Web Growth
scaling tab in the Print dialog box.
sets None is always the first item in the list.

Set All types are Scaling.

type

Name Name of the scaling set

Ink Number of units that you defined when creating this scaling set
Units

Sheet Press sheet width that you defined when creating this scaling set
Width

137
Scaling Set setup dialog boxes
Select Resources > Web Growth Compensation Sets, and if prompted, locate and
open your compensation sets folder.

New
Click Scaling Set to add a new set.

Option Description

Name Maintain a clear, consistent approach to naming the scaling sets.

Number Type the number of ink units in the target press.

of ink
units

Reference Type the number of the ink unit that prints the reference ink
ink unit against which all other units are scaled. In general, the last ink unit
on the press is the reference unit.

Sheet Type the width of the web press sheet. This value appears next to
width the scaling set name in the Web Growth Compensation Sets
dialog box, to make it easier to select a suitable set.

Copy
Select an existing set, and click Copy.

Option Description

Name Accept or edit the name of the scaling set copy.

Reference Type the number of the ink unit that prints the reference ink. In
ink unit general, the last ink unit on the press is the reference unit.

Number Type the number of ink units in the target press.

of ink
units

Sheet Type the width of the web press sheet. This value appears next to
width the scaling set name in the Web Growth Compensation Sets
dialog box, to make it easier to select a suitable set.

138
 Edit
Select an existing set, and click Edit.

Option Description

Name Displays the name of the scaling set that you selected in the Web
Growth Compensation Sets dialog box

Reference Displays the ink unit number of the reference ink unit
ink unit

Ink unit Map the unit numbers (1 is the first unit) to scaling percentages.
At press time, you can map the units to the colors in the job. The
percentages remain mapped to the unit numbers.

Scaling The reference ink unit is always scaled at 100 percent; define
scaling percentages for the other ink units relative to the reference
unit.

7
139
7 Media and devices

Each press run targets a media resource that represents a media configuration for
a specific output device, or a virtual press-sheet-size media that allows the
selection to be made downstream.

Media configurations
A media configuration associates a media size and type with the device PPD file
that determines the supported sizes.
The supported media dimensions for a particular device are defined in the
device's PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. When setting up the software,
add the PPD files for each output device type that you will use, and then create
the media configurations for each media size that you use with a particular
device. If supported by the device PPD, you can also add custom media sizes.
When you add a new device PPD or create a new media configuration, the
information is stored in the Printers folder. You can share a single Printers
folder between multiple installations by setting the same path on the Folders tab
in the Preferences dialog box at each installation.
Note: When printing to a file type, your computer does not need to be physically
connected to the target device.
Standard media resources
The software includes a few standard media resources that cannot be deleted,
with limited options for editing their properties.
Use the default Generic PostScript Printer media resource to print directly
to a device that is connected to your computer's operating system, such
as a laser printer on your local network.
When the media choice will be made in a downstream system, you can
print to a virtual Press Sheet Size media that is equal to the stock size. You
can optionally add margins for marks that must print off the sheet.

Creating new media resources

To add a resource to the Media list, prepare a media configuration for a specific
target device. You can set up a media configuration for any valid size that is
defined in the device-specific PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files in the
Printers folder. The Preps software DVD provides several PPD files, and you
can obtain the most current PPD files directly from the manufacturer of your
imaging device. If a device is already installed on your operating system, you can
use a copy of the system's PPD file.

1. 140
 1. Copy the new device PPD file and paste it to the \Printers\ppd\
folder. The name of the PPD file must end in .ppd, and contain no special
characters.
Note: You can skip this step if the PPD file is already installed.

2. Select Resources > New Media.

3. Select the Media Type. The Media Type list displays all the media for
which a device PPD file exists in the \Printers\ppd\ folder.
Note: To create a virtual media configuration that is equal to or larger than
the stock size, select Press Sheet Size.
4. Provide a meaningful nickname for the new media configuration, and click
OK.
5. In the Media Configuration dialog box, select the size, and set any other
options that you need.
Note: For Press Sheet Size media configurations, you cannot change the
Size (PressSheetSize). However, you can optionally increase the size of the
output by specifying top, bottom, and side margins. You cannot set
margins for other media types.
6. Close the dialog box.

The new media resource appears in the Media list in the Resources pane. The
software stores the details for each media in a <MediaName>\printer.ppd
file in the Printers folder.
See also: About the lists in the Resources pane

Creating and using tile sets

Creating and storing a tile set for a specific media resource gives you the choice
of sending output to the full media size, or to tiles that can be stripped together
after imaging. Tiling breaks up the output so that it can be imaged onto a smaller
media size than the stock for which a layout is designed.

1. Determine the media dimensions and any punch requirements of the

device that will image the tiles.
2. Plan how the tiles can be stripped to fit the final media and stock, including
the number of tiles needed, the grid arrangement, and any overlap
dimensions.

141
 3. In the Media list, select the media for which you will create the tile set.
4. Select Resources > New Tile Set.
5. Specify the following details for the tile set:
The tile media and device information, including the punch
coordinates
The tile grid's horizontal and vertical page count
The tile orientation and overlap
The distance from the trim edge of the stripped tiles to the sheet
edge
The tile set appears in a sublist under the media resource in the
Media list.
6. Start a job and build the layout, including any marks that are required for
the final output.
7. In the Media list, select and add the media's tile set to the layout.

8. Select Resources > Add Tile Mark to Sheet, and choose the Mark Type that
corresponds to the tile orientation.
9. Print the tiles.
Tip: To suppress a message that appears when printing to a media that is
smaller than the sheet, select the Skip device warning check box on the
Output tab in the Preferences dialog box.
a. Select File > Print.
b. In the Media list, select the tile set.
c. Set up the other print options as needed, and click Print.
The printed tiles are imaged according to the tile set, and the tile
marks appear in the overlapping area of adjacent tiles:

10. Overlap the printed tile sheets using the tile alignment marks, based on
matching numbers. For example, the tile marks on adjacent overlapping
tiles might be x1y1 and x1y2.
142
 X indicates a vertical column position.
Y indicates a horizontal row.
The colors on the paired marks are reversed, which helps you to
determine whether adjacent tiles are positioned correctly.

Adjacent tiles before stripping: Tiling marks correctly aligned:

The stripped tiles form a flat:

Note: Tile sets are saved only as a media resource; they are not saved with the
job.
Next: If you used tiling for proofing, you can print the job again, sending the
output to the media resource instead of the tile set.

Media Configuration settings

Edit or define a new media resource in the Media Configuration dialog box. In the
Press Runs workspace, you can select the layout's media to view its settings in
the Properties pane.

Nickname
The name that you specified in the Add Media dialog box

Short name
Derived from the PPD. If the PPD does not provide a short name for the device,
the media nickname is displayed.

Media type
The type that you selected in the Add Media dialog box

143
Size
List of supported media sizes. The selected size is applied by the media resource.

Margin
Optionally set top, bottom, and side margins to add an allowance for marks that
must print off the sheet.

Divided output path

The folder location that collects any divided output for this media resource
To set or change the path, click Select.
To use the default output path that is specified on the Folders tab in the
Preferences dialog box, click Use default.
Note: You cannot type or copy a path into this box. Also, when printing
divided output, you cannot override the folder location. It can only be
changed here.

Alignment, Horizontal, Vertical

If needed, specify offset amounts to keep the image within the usable area of the
media or to compensate for a small mechanical misalignment in the device. You
can store different alignment information for each size that is supported by a
device.
Note: This setting is effective only if the Center Image in Media check box is
cleared on the Output tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Connection
Displays the Connection dialog box

Error Log
Available only if you received an error message while printing output to this
device; displays the error information

Job Log
Displays a Job Log of status messages that are generated by the output device
each time you print a job to that device

Punch
Displays the Punch Location dialog box
Custom Size
Displays the Edit Custom Size dialog box, from which you can access the Custom
Size dialog box

144
 PPD Information
Available only if you already edited the PPD settings using the PPD Browser;
displays the PPD Information window, which lists only those settings that are no
longer at their default values. To change any of these or other PPD settings, use
the PPD Browser tool.

Media list in the Resources pane

The Media list contains the software's pre-defined standard media and the media
resources that you configure to target specific devices. You can also store tile
sets for specific media resources. Use this list to specify the media size and its
target device for a press run. You can also use the context menus to manage the
media resources.

Nickname
The name that you specified in the Add Media dialog box

Dimensions
Height and width of the media Size that is currently selected in the Media
Configuration dialog box

Punch
Vertical offset of the punch, derived from the Punch Location settings in the
Media Configuration dialog box. This offset appears in the workspace as a dark
gray area between the defined punch center and the bottom edge of the media.
The media punch edge and stock punch grip edge are always displayed at the
bottom of the workspace, whether the punch orientation is set to A, B, C, or D.
For example, if the punch orientation is B (right edge), then the media object in
the workspace rotates 90° to show the media punch at the bottom. The stock
that you add does not rotate.

Size
Names the area on which the layout will print; derived from the PageSize value
in the device PPD file

Context menus
Right-click a resource item to access a context menu.

Add
Displays the Add Media dialog box

145
 Edit
Displays the Media Configuration dialog box for the selected media resource

Delete
Deletes the media configuration from the Printers folder

Connecting a printer for direct printing

To print directly to a device such as a laser printer on your network, define the
connection in its media configuration.
Requirement: The printer must already be installed and selectable on your
computer.

1. In the Media list, right-click Generic PostScript Printer, and select Edit.
2. In the Media Configuration dialog box, click Connection.
3. In the Connection dialog box, select the printer.
4. Click Test Print.
5. After the test page prints, click OK.
Tip: If a test page does not print, troubleshoot the printer and operating
system setup.

Determining the punch location

To automatically position press sheets so that the image is accurately centered
on the center pin of a punch system, you calculate and define the punch
coordinates for the media configuration.

1. In the Media Configuration dialog box, select the Media Size.

2. Click Punch.
3. In the Punch Location dialog box, click Punch Test to generate a test page.
4. Position the imaged test page so that it is oriented to match the diagram in
the dialog box.
5. In the Punch Orientation area, select the letter that represents the punch
side of the media. By default, a punch mark appears centered on the
bottom edge of the press sheet (A).
6. Measure the X axis:
a. Click the X Axis box to display arrows in the diagram that show
which measurement from the test to use.
b. On the test media, measure from the center of the test image to the
center of the punch system.
c. Type this measurement in the X Axis box.
146
 7. Measure the Y axis:
a. Click the Y Axis box to display arrows in the diagram that show
which measurement from the test to use.
b. Measure from the center of the punch center hole to where the
center measurement line would extend off the media.
c. Type this measurement in the Y Axis box.
8. Click OK.
9. Print a placeholder layout to check the placement of the punch mark.

The punch coordinates remain at these settings until you edit them.

Turning off punch marks in the output

Specify a location for the punch mark that is beyond the edge of the press sheet.
By default, a punch mark appears centered on the bottom edge of the press
sheet. Use this procedure if you do not want the punch mark to appear on the
press sheet, or to include an amount for setback or plate bend.

1. In the Preferences dialog box, load the profile that you want to use for
printing without punch marks.
2. On the Output tab in the Preferences dialog box, clear the Display punch
mark check box.
The punch mark will not preview or print in job layouts while this check
box is cleared.
3. To permanently turn punch marks off in all press runs that you print using
this profile, save the currently loaded profile.

Using custom media sizes

When none of the standard media sizes in a device PPD file fit a job's needs, you
can use a custom size, if supported by the PPD.
Note: In PPD files, the media size is referred to as the device PageSize.

1. In the Media list, right-click the media resource, and select Edit.
2. In the Media Configuration dialog box, click Custom Size.
This button is available only if the device PPD supports custom media
sizes.
3. Choose a task:
To add a new media size, click Add, give the new size a name, and
specify its dimensions and orientation.
To change an existing custom media size, select the size name,
click Edit, and edit the dimensions, name, and orientation, as
needed.

147
 To delete an existing custom media size, select the size name, and
click Delete. You cannot delete a standard size.
Note: Standard sizes that are defined in the PPD files cannot be
edited or deleted.

4. Click OK as needed to apply your changes and return to the Media

Configuration dialog box.
The Size list contains your changes.
5. Choose one of the following steps:
Select the new size for this media resource, and close the dialog
box.
Do not select the new size. Close the dialog box, right-click the
same item in the Media list, and select Add. You can then create a
new media resource with a new nickname for your new custom
size.

You can now use the custom media for a press run. The grip edge appears at the
bottom of the workspace, according to the orientation that you specified.

Custom Size dialog box

In the Media Configuration dialog box, click Custom Size.

Option Description

Name Type a descriptive name for this media size. The name can be up
to 40 characters long and must not include any special
characters, spaces, slashes ( / or \ ), colons ( : ), tabs, or new line
characters.

Width, Specify the dimensions of the custom media.

Height

Orientation The availability of orientations depends on the capabilities of the

device and always includes 0, which is the default device
orientation as defined in the PPD. The default can be 0, 90, 180,
or 270 degrees, depending on what the RIP uses as the load edge.
Custom media orientation settings 1, 2, and 3, if available, rotate
the orientation in 90-degree increments.

Moving the Printers folder

You might want to set a single Printers folder to be shared by multiple
installations, or copy the device PPD files and media configurations from a
previous installation to a new installation of the software. A software restart is
required whenever you move the Printers folder.
148
 1. Create the new Printers folder, if it does not exist.

2. Move your existing device files to the new folder.

Be sure to include the printers.psm file.
3. On the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box, set the new location.
4. Restart the software to activate the new location.

See also: Folders and files that you can move or share

Media-related files
To ensure that the software knows about the available media sizes and device
capabilities, you must add a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for each
device. All files that are required to support media resources are stored in the
Printers folder. Information about a device's media support can be provided in
any of the following files:
PPX files: A PostScript printer extension (PPX) file can be used to expand
the PPD information to allow a device to take advantage of capabilities
such as custom media sizes, punch coordinates, and page positioning. If
there is conflict between a PPD and PPX, the PPX is used. Not all devices
need a PPX file.
Device PPD files: When you add a media resource, a printer.ppd file
stores its information inside a new folder with the same name as the
nickname. If you change the configuration settings, the printer.ppd
file is automatically updated. If necessary, you can edit additional settings
using the PPD Browser tool that is installed with the software.
Note: Although you can edit the supported settings, PPD files are
copyrighted and should not be modified.
Default PPD file: If the software cannot find required information in a PPD
or PPX file, it uses the configuration defaults that are stored in the
defaults.ppd file in the /Printers/PPD/ folder.
The software looks for information in this sequence: printer.ppd file > PPX
file (if available) > device PPD file > defaults.ppd file.
Note: You can replace the pre-installed PPD files or add new PPD or PPX files.
The best source for an up-to-date PPD is the device manufacturer.

Editing a PPD file using PPD Browser

PPD Browser is standalone software that is automatically installed with the Preps
software.
Depending on the device, the PPD settings that you can change in PPD Browser
generally include settings that you cannot change in the Media Configuration
dialog box.

1. 149
 1. Start PPD Browser by double-clicking its icon in the installation folder. (On
the Microsoft Windows operating system, select PPD Browser from the
Start menu.)
The Installed Devices list that appears contains all devices for which you
already added a PPD file.
Note: PPD Browser will be unable to find the printer.ppd file if a media
configuration nickname includes characters from the extended character
set.

2. Select a device, and click OK. (If a message indicates that PPD Browser
cannot read the file that you selected, obtain an updated PPD file from the
manufacturer.)
Each device has one or two tabs of settings: one labeled with the name of
the device, and one, if available, for the installed options. Icons indicate
whether a default or edited value is currently applied when you print to this
device:
A printer icon indicates a default value.
A pointing hand icon indicates a non-default value that you can
edit.
3. On each available tab, edit the settings as needed.
Tip: To make a setting editable, click the icon to change it to a pointing
hand.
Note: If an installed option is not set correctly for a particular device,
related settings on the other tab might be unable to accept your changes.
4. Select File > Save Settings.
After saving, you cannot choose Revert, but you can manually restore the
previous settings, if known, or you can delete the device and add it back to
restore the default settings.
5. To select another device to edit, select File > Open Device.

In the Media Configuration dialog box, the PPD Information button becomes
available only if the PPD file was edited. You can then view the non-default
settings that were applied.

Checking a media's job log

Information about each job that is printed to a media configuration is
accumulated in its job log.

1. In the Media list, right-click the media that you want to check, and select
Edit.
2. In the Media Configuration dialog box, click Job Log.
3. Review the job log.

The log is updated with the job name, print time and the number of pages,
separations, and copies. Unsuccessful or canceled jobs are also noted.

150
 When you close the software, the job log is saved so you can go back and look at
logs from the past, if necessary. The log.txt files are stored in the Printers
folder.

8
151
8 Marks

All marks that you can create and add to press runs are based on the Kodak
SmartMarks software technology. Each mark is dynamically placed and sized,
based on the positioning rules that you configure and store in its SMK file. You
can create text, line, rectangle, crop, fold, collation, and custom SmartMarks and
groups, and you can also set preferences for built-in side guide and center sheet
marks. The Preps 7.0 software includes two new SmartMarks: bearer bars and
micro dots.

General mark tasks

You can add, edit, duplicate, copy, reposition, and delete SmartMarks, set up
mark groups, and add your own image files to use for custom or duplicating
marks.

Adding a new resource to the Marks list

To add a new resource to the Marks list, you define a mark that is based on an
existing SmartMarks (SMK) file. You can create, edit, and duplicate individual
marks or groups as needed.

1. On the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box, set the default Templates
, Marks, and Resources path for this installation.
2. Choose a method to create or modify a mark:
Select Resources > New SmartMark, choose a mark type, and edit
its name and properties.
In the Marks list, right-click a mark to use as the basis, select
Duplicate or Edit, edit its name and properties, and save the mark
or a copy of the mark with a new name.
3. Save the mark to a location in the /Marks/SmartMarks/ folder.
The mark's positioning information is stored in its <MarkName>.smk file.
Important: Only marks that are stored in this folder appear in the Marks
list.
4. Optional: Create a group of marks that can be added and automatically
positioned simultaneously:
a. Create a new subfolder within the SmartMarks folder, with a
name to identify this mark group.
b. Drag or copy the SMK files for this group into the new folder.

152
 An info.smg file stores the information about the group in the same folder as
the individual SMK files.
The marks and groups that you create appear in the Marks list in the Resources
pane.

Adding a mark to a press-run layout

When you add a mark to a press run, it is anchored and positioned automatically
according to its defined properties.
In the Marks list, select and double-click marks to add them to the currently
selected press-run layout. You can add individual marks, mark groups, and
selected marks from within a group to a press-run layout. The job file references
any mark files that it uses. However, if you edit or move a placed mark so that its
properties no longer match a stored SMK file, the mark data is embedded and
stored in the job file.

Deleting a mark from the Marks list

Note: This action cannot be undone. It does not delete any instances of this mark
that were modified or moved after they were placed on the sheet.

1. In the Marks list, right-click a mark.

2. Select Delete to permanently remove the mark file from the Marks folder
and Marks list, including all placed instances of this mark.

Editing a placed mark

1. If the mark on the press run is an unedited instance of a mark resource,
locate and right-click the highlighted mark name in the Marks list, and
choose Select in Sheet.
This selects all placed instances of the mark and displays its settings in the
Properties pane.
2. If the placed mark does not exist in the Marks list, choose a method.
Click a mark, or press and hold Shift while clicking multiple marks.
If the mark is small, click the Zoom tool, and click or draw a
marquee around the area that contains the mark.
3. In the Properties pane, edit the properties as needed.
When you modify a placed mark, its name is no longer highlighted in the
Marks list, because it is no longer an exact instance of the original mark
file. The placed mark properties are stored with the job.
Note: Editing a mark file by right-clicking it in the Marks list does not affect
instances of this mark that were previously added to a press sheet.

Dragging a mark to a new position

1. In the placed mark's properties, clear the Lock mark to this position check
box.
153
 2. Drag the mark to a new position.
The offset values are immediately updated in the placed mark's properties.
When you save the job, the mark is automatically locked in its new
position.

Copying marks between press sheets

1. Select the mark or marks on the current press run.
2. From the Edit menu, select Copy.
3. Select another press sheet.
4. From the Edit menu, select Paste.

Creating a mark group

You can create a group of marks that can be added and automatically positioned
at the same time.
Requirements: Create all the mark resources that you want to place into a group.
For example, a mark group might contain a flat identifier text mark, fold mark,
crop marks, color bar, and custom registration marks for your press.

1. Create a new subfolder in the SmartMarks folder, with a name to identify

this mark group.
2. Drag or copy the SMK files for this group into the new folder.
An info.smg file stores the information about the group in the same
folder as the individual SMK files, and the new group appears in the Marks
list.

Managing placed crop and fold marks

Choose a task:
To select a crop or fold mark: Press Option/Alt+click the mark.
To select multiple crop or fold marks: Hold Shift+Option/Alt and click the
marks one at a time.
To delete crop or fold marks: Select the marks (press Option/Alt or
Shift+Option/Alt), and press Delete.
To restore a partial set of crop marks to a full set: In the crop mark
properties, click the Place crop marks on outside of imposition check box
until it is in a cleared state or selected state with a white background,
depending on your requirements.
To delete an entire crop mark set: Select one or more crop marks, and
press Delete.
You can optionally configure default white knockout under marks on the
Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

154
Legacy static marks in older files
When you must reopen older jobs or templates in this newer software version,
any existing legacy static marks will be either autoconverted to SmartMarks,
retained, or deleted, depending on various factors.
Rectangle, line, and text marks can be retained as static marks in a job, as
long as you do not edit them. Otherwise, the mark will be converted to a
sheet-anchored SmartMark.
All static crop marks on a sheet become page-anchored crop SmartMarks.
Static exposure marks are retained as static marks. They can be edited
and are included in the output. There is no corresponding type of
SmartMark for exposure bars.
If you open a file that contains an unsupported type of static mark, a
message informs you that the mark will be deleted if you continue.
Any converted or deleted static marks in a job are stored with the job. The
original template is not affected.

Marks Preferences settings

You can store default mark settings in a profile, including mark dimensions and
text-mark fonts.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > Marks.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > Marks.

Defaults
Specify the following default measurements:
Rectangle Mark Width
Rectangle Mark Height
Crop Mark Distance
Crop Mark Length
Line Width
Fold Mark Length

Marks Place Order

Specify the order in which SmartMarks are placed on the press sheet:
First On Top
Last On Top

155
Text Marks
View the currently installed and designated default font for each of the following
text-mark types:
General Text Mark Font
Roman Text Mark Font
CJK Text Mark Font
CJK Text Mark Font Preview
CJK Text Mark Character Collection

Sheet Marks
Use sheet marks: If you do not want to specify default settings for side guides and
center marks, clear this check box. Selecting this check box activates the
following options.
Place side guides: [ ] From [ ]: On sheetfed presses, side guides are used
to position the sheet as it feeds into the press. Specify the distance that is
needed between the center of the side guides and the edge from which
you are measuring (this is the gripper edge).
Length of center marks: Specify the length of the center marks that
indicate the top and bottom centers of the press sheet. The top center
mark begins 3 mm (1/8 in.) above the press sheet, and the bottom center
mark begins 3 mm (1/8 in.) below the press sheet. If you do not want
center marks, type 0.

Other Marks
Add white KO under crop marks: Select the check box to include white
knockout.
Add white KO under fold marks: Select the check box to include white
knockout.
Step collation mark from offset origin: Select this option to start the
collation mark at the selected origin plus offset value.
Ignore marks output error messages: Select this option to ignore warnings
about marks not fully on media when printing.

Common settings for SmartMarks

Settings that you can edit for most SmartMark types include name, anchor, and
placement information, and options for saving, creating, and duplicating marks.
Note: For information about settings that are unique to a specific mark type, see
the topic about the applicable mark settings.

156
Settings for identifying marks

Mark Type
Properties pane only—Displays the SmartMark type on which the selected mark
is based.

Name
The mark name can be edited only when creating a new SmartMark or editing a
selected mark in the Properties pane, or you can use the Rename context-menu
item for marks in the Marks list.
The name that you specify for a new SmartMark becomes the mark's default
SMG file name in the Save As dialog box when you save the new or edited mark
file.
In the Properties pane, if you edit the name of a selected placed mark, no
corresponding SMG file is created. The mark name and settings are stored only in
the JOB file and TPL file, if applicable.

Settings for anchoring marks

Anchor to
Select the component to which the mark will be anchored, and, on the diagram,
click a reference point for the selected component.

Mark Anchor
On the diagram, click a reference point for the mark image.

Margins or offsets (various labels)

Type the amounts of horizontal and vertical space to allow between the mark and
component anchor points.

Lock mark to this position

Clear this check box to temporarily allow the mark to be dragged to a new
position. The repositioned mark is automatically locked in its new position, and
any offset values are updated.

157
Settings for placing marks on press runs

Front, Back, Both

Specify the side or sides on which to place the mark.
Range: When anchoring custom or crop marks to a page or page bleed, you can
specify a page range.
Use a dash to indicate a range, and use a comma to separate multiple values (1-
4,9-12,21-24). Do not insert spaces.

Bring to front
Select this check box to print the mark on top of any other content.

Mirror on back
Select this check box to print the mark in the same relative position on the back of
the press sheet. If you flip the press sheet in the workspace, you can see that the
mark is in the same place. Mirrored text in text marks is reversed. This option
does not apply to crop, collation, or fold marks.

Place on every
Specify the press runs on which the mark is to print.
For example, to place it on every second press run starting with the second press
run, type 2 in both boxes. To print the mark on all press runs, accept the default
values (1, 1).

Only on Job Layout Report

This option restricts the mark to printing on the Job layout report only. The mark
will not print on the production layout.

Restrict to section
This option is available for custom, collation, and text marks. To add this mark to
only one section of a multiple-section press run, select this check box, then select
the section number on which to place this mark.

Lock mark to this position

Clear this check box to temporarily allow the mark to be dragged to a new
position. The repositioned mark is automatically locked in its new position and
any offset values are updated.

158
Settings for saving your mark edits
Mark resources can be edited and saved via the Resources menu and the context
menus in the Marks list. On press-run layouts, you can edit the properties of
selected marks, and your edits are stored with the job without affecting the mark
resource files.
The available buttons depend on how you access the mark properties:
Via the Properties pane: No buttons are provided, because this pane
applies only to the current press run.
Via the Resources menu: The dialog box provides Cancel, Save, and Apply
& Save buttons.
Clicking Apply & Save places this mark on the current press run, saves it
as a SMK file, and adds it to the Marks list. A reference to the SMK file is
saved in the JOB file, unless you edit or move the placed mark.
Via the Edit context menu item in the Marks list: The dialog box provides
Cancel, Save, and Save a Copy As buttons.
Via the Duplicate context menu in the Marks list: The dialog box provides
Cancel and Save buttons. The file is saved with the same name, with the
addition of Copy, then you can use the Rename context menu item, as
needed.

Mark types whose colors can be edited

The Mark Color dialog box can be accessed when configuring the following mark
types:
Text
Line
Rectangle
Crop
Fold
Collation
Bearer Bars

Mark anchors
SmartMarks can be anchored to the points that you specify on press sheets,
pages, page bleeds, or media. You can set horizontal and vertical offsets to allow
space between the mark image and component anchor points.
When adding most SmartMarks to a press-run layout, you choose the layout
component to which you are adding the mark, and then you select two anchor
points: on the rectangle that represents the mark image and the rectangle that

159
represents the component.

For example, selecting the upper-left anchor points:

Results in this mark position:

Anchor-to Rectangle description

component

Press sheet Dimensions of the stock resource

Media Dimensions and position of the media resource

Note: To print marks that extend off the sheet when
the media is smaller than the sheet, use a Press Sheet
Size media resource that is configured with an extra
margin.

Page or page bleed Trim or bleed dimensions of a template page or ganged

page group
Note: A page-anchored mark is placed on all instances
of the page and shifts to match any page orientation
changes.

Imposition or Farthest extents of the trim boxes or the bleed boxes of

Imposition with all pages in an imposition
bleeds

Gutter (horizontal, Set of horizontal or vertical rectangles between trim

vertical) boxes of the pages of an imposition and between the
opposing edges of the imposition-with-bleeds
rectangle

160
 Margin (top, bottom, Rectangle between the corresponding edges of the
left, right) imposition and press sheet, and between the opposing
edges of the imposition

Margin (top left, top Rectangle between the corresponding corners and
right, bottom left, edges of the imposition and press sheet
bottom right)

"Bring to Front" for overlapped marks

To ensure that the correct mark is printed on top of the others, you need to know
the default layer sequence that the software applies.
If you overlap marks on a press-run layout, the Bring to Front option gives you
some control over which mark is to print on top. However, if you place a mark
group, you are adding several SmartMarks at once, all of which might be set to
Bring to Front.
When you add individual SmartMarks that overlap:
The first mark that you add to a press sheet becomes the topmost mark.
Each subsequent mark that you add will be on top of the previous mark.
When you create and import a SmartMarks group:
Marks in a group are added in ascending order, sorted by file name.
The highest mark on the press sheet has the lowest file name, and the rest
of the marks are added in top-down order.
The easiest way to control the layering is by adding numbers to the mark file
names, giving the lowest number to the mark that you want on top.
For example, in this SmartMarks group, the 1_Custom mark is the highest mark
and 4_Bottom_Rectangle is the lowest:
1_Custom
2_Registration_Custom
3_Yellow_Rectangle
4_Bottom_Rectangle
Note: If any individual SmartMarks are added after this group is placed, then they
are placed on top of it.

161
Mark Color dialog box
The Mark Color button is available for the following mark types:
Text
Line
Rectangle
Crop
Fold
Collation
Bearer Bars
Custom
All Separations: %Screen
Prints the mark on all separations. In the %Screen box, specify the screening
percentage.
Spot Color: %Screen, SSiCustomColor
Prints the mark on the separations that are mapped to the spot color that you
specify. In the %Screen box, specify the screening percentage.
In the SSiCustomColor box, type an SSi custom color name and number, such as
SSiCustomColor101. The SSi custom color number is a placeholder that can
be mapped to any spot color or process color equivalent when you set up the
Print Color Separations tab. You can prevent a mark from printing by setting its
color build to all zeroes.
Process Color: %Cyan, %Magenta, %Yellow, %Black
Prints the mark on process color separations. Type the CMYK percentages to
specify the process color build for the mark.
Note: You can adjust the color and select Reverse for the Mark types listed
above.

Custom and duplicating marks

Custom marks can be created from existing marks or by adding your own image
files. When creating a duplicating mark, you set up an image file to repeat
automatically to fill a specified area.

Mark image files

Custom marks that you create require an EPS and PDF version of the image. You
select the EPS image file when creating a custom mark, and the corresponding
PDF file is automatically included in the output. EPS marks can optionally be
included with PJTF or JDF output.
Image files for the following custom mark types are included in the Preps
software:
Registration marks

162
 Short- and long-side guides
Bender mark for NELA plate-bending system, to help ensure accurate
positioning on the cylinder
Color bar duplicating marks (located in the Dupmarks folder)
In-RIP color ID marks in various rotations
Digital exposure test mark
Device resolution text mark
Collation marks (available as PostScript only)
Bar code marks for WST and Müller Martini (MM) equipment (available
as PostScript only)
Micro Dot and Micro Dot Double marks
To use PostScript-based marks such as the collation marks and bar code marks,
you must enable the Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF option on the Output
tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Bar codes in custom marks

JDF or PJTF output can include PostScript marks flats that contain custom bar
codes for preventing collation and folding errors in postpress equipment. The
finishing equipment scans the coded text-mark variables in each mark to check
that all the signatures belong to the same job and are in the correct sequence.
Note: Before adding PostScript-coded marks such as bar codes to a job, you must
select the Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF check box on the Output tab in the
Preferences dialog box.
When deciding where to place a bar code mark, be sure to apply any guidelines
provided by the finishing equipment manufacturer. You typically place the bar
code in the spine or grip area, positioned so that the bar code scanner will be able
to read it.
The bar code that you select depends on the target equipment that the mark was
designed for, in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. The software
includes bar code images that can be read by Müller Martini and Wafer Systems
Technologies (WST) optical scanners during job finishing:
The MM-barcode128c.eps bar code for Müller Martini's automatic
signature detection (Asir3) or compliant equipment, contains the job ID (
0-4999), signature ID (0-99), and total number of signatures in the output.
Note: This description explains how the information is defined in the bar
code mark. The Asir3 format is proprietary, and bar code readers other
then Müller Martini's may display the human-readable bar code in a
format that does not match this description.

163
 The WST-bar2of5.eps WST-compliant bar code contains the job ID
(0-99999) and signature ID (0-99), and the WST-bar2of5w-text.
eps mark also displays a human-readable version of the numbers
represented by the bar code symbols.

Each mark contains the job and signature ID text-mark variables, with a defined
number of digits allocated for each variable. Leading zeros automatically fill the
bar code when fewer digits are required. Otherwise, the value is truncated from
the front to the defined number of digits:
If a bar code allocates two digits for a signature ID, and the actual job
signature number is 5, 105, or 205, the bar code represents the signature
as number 05.
If a job ID is allocated five digits, and the actual job ID is 123, the bar code
uses number 00123. If the actual job ID is 12345678, the number 45678 is
used.
Note: All ID numbers must contain digits only. The job will fail to preview or print
if an applicable ID contains any characters that are not numeric. If the job does
not contain a job ID and the bar code requires the job ID, the job will still print,
but the job ID portion of the bar code will be set to all zeros.
Bar code marks are cross-platform compatible. However, they can be previewed
only on the same platform (Microsoft Windows or Mac OS) on which the press-
run layout was created.
If you have a solid understanding of the PostScript language and bar code
technology, you can edit the number of digits for the signature and job ID.

Micro dots
Micro dots are new SmartMarks that were added for flexographic printing.

1. Select Resources > New SmartMark > Custom Mark.

2. Edit the properties:
a. Give the new mark file a suitable name.
b. In the image file options, select REG_Micro Dot.pdf or
REG_Micro Dot_Double.pdf.
c. Edit the anchor and placement details as needed.
d. Use the Duplicate fields to easily duplicate the mark. Enter the
number of times to duplicate the mark, select the direction of the
duplicates (horizontal or vertical), and enter the distance (gap)
between them.
3. Save the mark to the SmartMarks folder in the configured Preferences
folder location for marks.
Mark image files can reside anywhere in the Marks folder or subfolders.

164
Adding a new custom mark
A custom mark consists of an image file and the SMK file that stores its
positioning rules.

1. Skip this step if your workflow does not require a TIFF mark in the output. If
your workflow requires TIFF marks, you must wrap the image in both an
EPS file and a PDF file.
a. Prepare the TIFF image in your source software.
b. Use Adobe Illustrator to create a new document with the exact
dimensions as the TIFF image.
c. Place the TIFF image into the document.
2. Save the image document as a PDF file.
3. Save your image document as an EPS file.
Set the preview as recommended for your software version, and enable the
option for including linked files.
4. Place the PDF and EPS image files into the Marks folder.
5. Select Resources > New SmartMark > Custom Mark.
6. Edit the properties:
a. Give the new mark file a suitable name.
b. Locate and select the mark image file.
c. Edit the anchor and placement details as needed.
d. Use the Duplicate fields to easily duplicate the mark. Enter the
number of times to duplicate the mark, select the direction of the
duplicates (horizontal or vertical), and enter the distance (gap)
between them.
7. Save the mark to the SmartMarks folder in the configured
Preferences folder location for marks.
Mark image files can reside anywhere in the Marks folder or subfolders.
Note: If you add a custom EPS mark image file with the same file name as
an existing mark image file, the original file is overwritten.

The new custom mark is added to the Marks list.

When you add the custom mark to a job, the SmartMark rules will retrieve the
correct image file for previewing and printing.
To use PostScript-based marks such as the collation marks and bar code marks,
you must enable the Output PS marks flats for PJTF/JDF option on the Output
tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Custom Mark settings

You can add a new custom mark for an existing mark or image file that you create
in your choice of software. Custom mark images are also used to create
duplicating marks.
165
 Image file
Select the image file (from the drop-down menu) to use in the mark.

Rotation
Select the number of degrees to rotate the mark image clockwise around the
mark anchor point.
You can duplicate (or step-and-repeat) custom marks on press sheets. Configure
the duplicate pattern in the dialog box for the Custom Mark settings, or in the
Marks properties pane. Enter the number of times to duplicate the custom mark
vertically or horizontally on the sheet, and specify the distance to repeat the
mark.

Creating a new duplicating mark (color bar)

Create a duplicating mark that repeats a mark image file to automatically fill a
specified area.

1. In the Marks folder, select the EPS and PDF version of an existing custom
mark image file.
2. Move the mark image file to the Dupmarks folder. Do not copy the file.
A mark image file that is in the Dupmarks folder must not reside in
another location within the Marks folder.
3. Restart Preps software, so that it will recognize the mark file as a
duplicating mark.
4. Select Resources > New SmartMark > Duplicating.
5. Edit the properties:
a. Give the new mark a suitable name.
b. Locate and select the mark image file.
c. Specify the area that the mark is to fill.
d. In the Duplicate from list, select Left or Right to repeat the image
from one end of the mark length to the other, or select Center to
repeat it to either side from the center of the mark area.
e. Edit the remaining mark properties, as needed.
6. Click Save to automatically add the new duplicating mark to the Marks list.

The duplicating SMK file is stored in the SmartMarks folder and references the
custom mark image file in the Dupmarks folder. When you add this mark to a
press sheet, it will automatically repeat to fill the area that you specify.

166
Duplicating Mark settings
Use duplicating marks to add color bars to press sheets. The mark image
automatically duplicates within a specified area on a press sheet, typically across
its width or within a fixed area that you specify.

Image file
Select the image file (from the drop-down menu) to use in the mark.

Rotation
Select the number of degrees to rotate the mark image clockwise around the
mark anchor point.

Size Type
Select a fixed or variable size type, and specify the fixed dimension of the area
that is to be automatically filled with duplications of the color-bar mark image:
To create a fixed-size mark, select Fixed, and specify the Width and Height
in the text boxes that appear.
To create a vertical mark that automatically matches the height of the
component, select Variable height, and specify the mark thickness in the
Width text box that appears.
To create a horizontal mark that automatically matches the width of the
component, select Variable width, and specify the Height.

Duplicate from
From this list, select Left, Center, or Right to control where the duplication mark
originates from. If selecting Center, Preps will automatically duplicate the image
to either side of the center until the area is filled.

Do not apply workflow color calibration

Note: This option applies only to JDF or PJTF output. It is ignored for all other
output types.
Select this check box to generate a pair of marks flats: one containing the
uncalibrated version of the marks, the other with calibrated marks in case this is
needed downstream. Uncalibrated marks are not affected by color profiles or
curves applied to jobs.

Anchor to
Select the component to which the mark will be anchored. On the diagram, click a
reference point for the selected component.
Fixed-size mark: Choose any of the nine points.

167
 Vertical mark (variable height): Choose one of the three vertical anchor
points to anchor the mark to the left edge, center, or right edge of the
component.

Horizontal mark (variable width): Choose one of the three horizontal

anchor points to anchor the mark to the top edge, center, or bottom edge
of the component.

Offsets
Type the amounts of horizontal and vertical space to allow between the mark and
component anchor points, and between the mark image and component edge.
For a fixed-size mark: In the H Offset and V Offset text boxes, specify the
vertical and horizontal distances between the mark and component
anchor points.
For a vertical mark (variable height): In the H Offset and V Margin text
boxes, specify the horizontal distance from the component anchor point
and a width for the vertical margin between the mark and the component.
For a horizontal mark (variable width): In the V Offset and H Margin text
boxes, specify a vertical distance from the component anchor point and a
width for the horizontal margin between the mark and the component.

Text marks

Text-mark variables
When you add code words called variables to your text marks, their values are
derived from the job details and included in the output.
Notes:
Text-mark variable names are not case-sensitive.
Before Asian or other Unicode fonts can be rendered in text marks, the
CJK text-mark profile options must be correctly set on the Marks tab in
the Preferences dialog box.
In a Prinergy prepress workflow, you can also specify a Prinergy-type
variable mark that will be populated by Prinergy in the final output. For
example, include the Prinergy variable mark $[impplanname] to print
the Workshop-specific imposition name. (For the most predictable
results, avoid mixing these variables types in the same text mark.)

This variable Prints this content

$binderysig or Shows the bindery signature on the Press Run

$bs

$binderysigs or Shows all the bindery signature numbers on the

$bs.all Press Run

168
This variable Prints this content

$Comment Derived from the Comment that you type in the Print
dialog box

$Color The colors on the side of the sheet where the text
mark is placed

$ColorNum The numeric identifier for the color

Process colors: 00=multiple colors, 01=cyan,
02=magenta, 03=yellow, 04=black
Spot colors: The numbers 05 to 98
Composite: The number 99

$Customer Customer ID number specified in the Job Notes

dialog box

$Date Indicates when the job was last printed to file

$Device Derived from the Nickname in the Media

Configuration dialog box

$folio When used in page-anchored text marks, $folio

prints the folio that you assigned to each page in the
job's Pages List.

$JobDate, Indicates when the job was last saved

$JobTime

$JobID The job ID number

$JobName The job file name (includes the .job extension)

$Job_Title The name that you give the saved job

$LocaleLongDate, Same as $Date and $JobDate, except that the

$LocaleJobDate format is applied based on the current international
settings at the operating system level

$PressRunNumber The sequential number as it appears in the job's

Press Runs List

$PressSheetName

169
This variable Prints this content

The relative stock name. The stock can be specified

by an MIS JDF file, and the selected stock is included
in JDF output.

$runlist The runlist page number when used in page-

anchored text marks

$SheetHeight, The stock dimensions, in the default measurement

$SheetWidth unit

$Side The press sheet side (A = front, B = back). For

multiple-web press runs, the additional sides are
labeled C, D, and so on. If sides are printed together,
this variable is blank.

$Sig The section number

$SigName The name of the current press run

$Template The relative path and name of the signature's

template
Note: The relative path starts at the default
Templates folder (as set in Preferences). A colon[
: ] is used to delimit any subfolders in the path.

$Time The time the job was output, using the 24-hour clock

$Web The numeric identifier of the current press sheet

$XTile, $YTile The horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) tile identifiers. If
all tiles are printed together, this variable is blank.

Product Text Note

variable

$ProdName Based on the Product Name box

$ProdJobID Based on the Product Job ID box

$ProdCustomer Based on the Product Customer box

$ProdPgCt

170
 Product Text Note
variable

Based on the total number of pages associated with the

defined product

$ProdBindStyle Based on the binding style associated with the defined

product

$ProdComments Based on the comment field associated with the defined

product

Part Text variable Note

$PartName Based on the Part Name box

$PartType Based on the selection you make in the Part Type menu

$PartTrim Based on the width (W) and height (H) defined in the
Trim Size boxes

$PartBindStyle Based on the selection you make in the Part Binding Style
menu

$PartTotalSec Calculated based on the total number of sections

associated with the part

Text Mark settings

When setting text mark properties, you can type plain text and optionally include
text-mark variables that derive their values from a variety of sources. You can
also set default font information on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.
Note: Set the default text-mark font properties on the Marks tab in the
Preferences dialog box.

Text
Type the mark text, which can include text-mark variables such as $Job_Title.

Text Size
Type the text height in points.

171
Script
Select Roman or CJK to set the corresponding text-mark font that is defined on
the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Rotation
Select the number of degrees to rotate the mark image clockwise around the
mark anchor point.

Vertical Text
Select this check box if vertical characters will be used in the marks. The
appearance of vertical characters depends on the mark rotation.

Rotation when Vertical Text is selected:

Rotation when Vertical Text is not selected:

Flat Identifier Text

Select this check box to place the text mark in the same place on each press-
sheet side. For example, you might use this mark to identify the color separation
per plate, using the $Color or $ColorNum text-mark variable.

172
 Text Anchor
Click a reference point on the diagram, which represents the left edge of the first
text-mark character.

Creating a CJK text mark

Create text marks using a Roman-style or CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) font,
rotated as needed.

1. In the text mark's properties, select CJK from the Script list.
2. To create a vertical text mark, select the Vertical Text check box, and
specify the text orientation.
3. Edit the properties, as needed, for the new mark, then click Save.

Line Mark settings

Edit the mark length, line style, color, and placement details. You can also set the
default line width on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.
Note: Set the default line width on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Size
If you select Fixed Length, specify the Length of the line mark and the
Angle (number of degrees) by which it should be rotated.
Select Vertically centered or Horizontally centered if you require a
straight, centered line mark of variable length that is automatically sized
to fit the Anchor to selection.

Style
Select the line type (solid, dotted, or dashed).

Anchor
For fixed-length line marks, you can select any of the nine points in the Anchor to
diagram, and then specify any vertical and horizontal offsets to be applied to the
selected anchor point.
For variable-length marks, the anchor points are selectable vertical or horizontal
lines, corresponding to the selected Size centered option.
For vertically centered marks, you can apply a horizontal offset, and
specify how much vertical margin to allow. (Applying a vertical margin
shortens the line mark.)
For horizontally centered marks, the opposite applies.

173
 Horizontal, Vertical
Type the amounts of horizontal and vertical space to allow between the mark and
component anchor points.

Rectangle Mark settings

Edit the mark dimensions, line style, color, and placement details. You can also
set the default dimensions on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Size
Select a size type, and specify the mark's fixed or variable dimensions.
If you select Fixed, specify the mark's Width and Height.
If you select Height is variable, specify the fixed Width for a vertical
rectangle.
If you select Width is variable, specify the fixed Height for a horizontal
rectangle.
Note: Set the default dimensions on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Style
Select the line type (solid, dotted, or dashed).

Anchor
For fixed-size marks, you can choose any of the nine points in the Anchor to
diagram, and then specify any vertical and horizontal offsets to be applied to the
selected anchor point.
For variable-sized marks, the anchor points are selectable vertical or horizontal
lines, corresponding to the selected Size centered option.
For variable height marks, you can apply a horizontal offset and specify
how much vertical margin to allow. (Applying a vertical margin shortens
the mark's height.)
For variable width marks, the opposite applies.

Horizontal, Vertical
Type the amounts of horizontal and vertical space to allow between the mark and
component anchor points.

174
Crop Mark settings
Crop marks can be added and managed individually or as a set, and are always
anchored to pages. On the Output tab in the Preferences dialog box, you can
choose to shift the crop marks with page shingling, and print additional crop
marks for the bleed margins. On the Marks tab, you can also set an optional white
knockout.

Length
Type a length for the crop marks.
Note: Set the default length on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Offset from page

Type the distance from the page trim corners to place the crop marks. This
number can be negative.
Note: Set the default distance on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Style
Select the line type (solid, dotted, or dashed).

Place crop marks on outside of imposition

Select this check box to automatically prevent placement of any crop marks that
would be inside the imposition, such as in the gutters between the pages.

Bring to Front
Prints the mark on top of any other content
If Bring to Front is selected or cleared in the same way for both marks,
then the crop mark will print over a color bar.
If only one of the two overlapping marks is selected, then that mark will
print on top.
Note: Except for JDF and PJTF output types, all output types support printing crop
marks on top of duplicating marks.

Fold Mark settings

Edit the mark length, line style, color, and gutter offset. In the workspace, you can
select and delete individual marks, as needed.

175
Length
Type a length for the fold mark.
Note: Set the default length on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Offset
This number can be negative.

Style
Select the line type (solid, dotted, or dashed).

Collation Mark settings

Add collation marks to identify the planned sequence of the sections in a product
assembly, based on the binding style. If you change the page count or renumber
the pages, the collation marks adjust automatically. You can place collation
marks in the trim or content areas, anchored to low, high, or mid folio pages of
product sections. The marks can be trimmed off after the collation is checked at
the bindery.
You can also create static collation marks.

Binding
Select the binding style, which determines the placement of the marks. Select
None to define collation marks without binding style restrictions, based solely on
the position with respect to the page, on all sides of page 1 in the press run.
Note: A collation mark whose binding style does not match that of the section
will not image.

Type
Select a mark type that provides the desired character rotation and text-mark
font.
Collation Mark A: Numeric collation indicator inside the mark, rotated 90 degrees
Collation Mark B: Numeric collation indicator inside the mark, no rotation
Collation Mark C: No collation indicator inside the mark
Collation Mark A-123: Numeric indicator that shows the signature number
stacked in a column, when the value is two digits or higher; available when
creating a new smart collation mark
JA, ZH, ABC: Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Roman characters. Your selection
applies the corresponding text-mark font that is defined on the Marks tab in the
Preferences dialog box.

Collation Mark A-JA (rotated 90 degrees): Collation Mark B-ZH (no rotation):

176
Origin
Select the edge from which to offset the collation mark. The available options are
determined by the binding style.
Note: You can also set a Step collation mark from offset origin option on the
Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Width
Specify how wide each mark will be.

Length
Specify the distance from the starting point that can be used by the stepped
collation marks, after which the next mark is placed at the starting point again.

Step distance
Specify the distance between the optional text and collation mark, which can be
positive or negative, but not zero.

Optional Text
Type any text that is to trail the mark, and print in the same color as the mark.
You can use regular text and text-mark variables.
Note: The font used in the optional text is not affected by the type of collation
mark.

Script
Select Roman or CJK to set the corresponding text-mark font that is defined on
the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Vertical Text
Select this check box if vertical characters will be used in the marks. The
appearance of vertical characters depends on the mark rotation.
Rotation when Vertical Text is selected:

177
 Rotation when Vertical Text is not selected:

Step optional text with mark

Select this check box if you want the trailing text to step along with the mark.
Clear this check box if you want the text to appear at the same position on all job
signatures, such as for multi-section impositions.

Mixed Binding Collation mark

This can be used when your production includes signatures made up from
different binding styles—for example, you have two perfect bound signatures that
are made up from three saddle stitched signatures each. The perfect bound
signatures are the top level and each will get a signature number for the collation
mark. The saddle stitched signatures get the same signature number as the
parent and a tic line below indicating its number within the parent signature. The
image depicts the scenario in the example: the collation marks added with the
section assembly.

178
179
Static collation marks
You can also add static collation marks to Preps jobs or templates. These marks
can only be added through the Resources > New Mark > Static Collation Mark
menu item and they cannot be saved as a resource—they can only be saved in a
template or a job. They cannot be used in mark rules. You will need to specify the
following parameters:

Type
See above.

Mark Position
Select the Center mark on point check box to center the mark on an X and Y
access position on the sheet. Clear the check box to position the mark from the
Left and Bottom of the sheet.

Left or X Ctr
Enter the distance that you would like the mark to start from the left edge of the
sheet or the X Ctr value to center the mark on a point.

Bottom or Y Ctr
Enter the distance that you would like the mark to start from the bottom edge of
the sheet or the Y Ctr value to center the mark on a point.

Width
Specify how wide each mark will be.

Length
Specify the distance from the starting point that can be used by the stepped
collation marks, after which the next mark is placed at the starting point again.

Step distance
Specify the distance between the optional text and collation mark, which can be
positive or negative, but not zero.

Bearer Bars settings

Use bearer bars marks to add two rectangular marks on the sides of your press
sheets. These marks extend along the entire length of the press sheet; one bar is
placed on the left side of the press sheet, and the other is placed on the right side.
Bearer bars marks are of a single tone, and are placed on every plate in the job.
Typically, they are used for packaging jobs, but they can be used as ink take-off

180
 bars for all job types. You can adjust the width of these marks.
Note: The two bars behave as a unit, but you can select each bar individually. Use
ALT-opt to select and update an individual bar.

Width
Type a length for the width of the bearer bars mark.
Note: Set the default width on the Marks tab in the Preferences dialog box.

9
181
9 Administration

Use the administrative tools and techniques described in this section to set up
and manage your imposition workflow for efficient operation and diagnostics.
For example, you can:
Configure preference settings that suit your typical requirements and
store them in reusable profiles.
Ensure that folder paths are configured in a way that makes it easy to
retrieve the various file types that are required during imposition.
Set up job notes to provide the content for text mark variables.
Set up the software licensing.
Review status information about job activities.

Profiles and preferences

Configure preference settings that suit your most typical requirements, and store
them in reusable custom profiles.

Profiles for storing default settings

Many default settings are stored in the default profile of Preps software. You can
store customized settings in additional profiles to reuse for your most common
job types.
You might switch between custom profiles for:
Jobs that have similar custom requirements
Jobs that you run regularly
Settings for printing proofs
Settings for final output
Settings for individual prepress operators
The settings in profiles are stored in corresponding text files that have a CFG file
name extension. The Profiles/default folder contains the default profile (
default.cfg), and a new subfolder is automatically created to store each new
profile that you create.
Configuration subfolders and files are portable and can be copied into any other
installation's Profiles folder. Each CFG file must be in its own subfolder with
the same name.
In a configuration file, each line represents one option that can be turned on or
off, or set to a specific value. Most of these options are controlled by a dialog box.
Advanced users can edit technical options that are not exposed in a dialog box, as
needed.
182
 Note: You must start and close Preps software at least once after installation,
before you can see the default profile contents in a text editor. The Profiles
folder that contains the configuration files for the default profile and your custom
profiles cannot be shared. Each installation uses only its own Profiles folder.

Setting your preferences

You can set default values for various settings in the Preps software. Define your
preferences for the current session, and store the settings in a profile.

1. Open the Preferences dialog box:

In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences.
2. Set preferred values on each tab as needed.

The default values appear in various areas of the software where they are
typically editable for a specific purpose, without Preferences changing the stored
default values. You can only change the default values in the Preferences dialog
box.
Next: You can store different combinations of settings in custom profiles.

Using custom profiles

Store collections of preference settings in custom profiles, and edit or switch
profiles for specific purposes in a job or between jobs. You can follow these steps
as part of a job or without a job open. If you want to include print settings, a job
must be open.

1. Open the Preferences dialog box:

In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences.
2. In the Profile Name list, select a profile, and close the dialog box.
Choose a profile that you want to edit and save, or a profile on which you
want to base a new profile.
The settings in the Preferences dialog box change to match the stored
settings.
3. Edit the settings, as needed.
4. In the common area on the Preferences dialog box, click Save Profile.
5. Choose a task:
To save your edits to the currently loaded profile, accept the
displayed name and click OK.
To save the settings to a new profile, type a name for the profile,
then click OK.
If you saved a new profile, it is added to the Profile Name list, and
its CFG file is placed into a new folder with the same name, within
the Profiles folder.
183
 6. Repeat these steps, as needed, to create or edit additional profiles.

A profile's settings remain in effect until the next time you change them in the
Preferences dialog box.

General Preferences
Specify your preferred values for commonly used settings.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > General.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > General.

Defaults

Units
The unit type that you select is immediately applied to all displayed measurement
values.
Notes:
The default measurement unit for all non-English installations is Millimeter
.
Other selectable units are Centimeter, Inch (English default), Point, and
Pica.
Picas and points are based on the PostScript standard of 72 points to one
inch, not the traditional 72.31 points to one inch.
Whenever you type a measurement without including a unit type, the next
time that you view this property, the default unit will also be displayed.
If you type a measurement number and follow it with a unit that is
different from the default unit, then the next time that you view this
property, you will see that it was converted to the default unit. For
example, if you type 215.9 mm when the default is inches, it is converted
to 8.5 in.
Specify the values that will be presented as defaults for these items:
Default Work Style for press runs
Default Binding Style for sections
Default Stock for press sheets
Default Product Type for Commercial Print or Packaging
Page Width, Page Height for template pages
Default Bleed Limit for maximum size of bleed margins
Notes:
When an input file specifies bleed margins that are wider than this
limit, the margins are automatically reduced to the limit that you
specify here.
If no bleed is specified, the default bleed limit is applied to the
placed pages. (The input file is not affected.)

184
 The bleeds of adjacent pages are automatically adjusted so that
they meet in the middle between the pages, up to the maximum
that you specify here.
Press Sheet Edge to Punch Center for press runs
Perfect Bound and Saddle-Stitched trim, lip, and spine widths. For
example, you can set a default lip width for saddle-stitchers to use for
pulling the signatures. For perfect-bound work, you can set a default width
to allow for grind-off and gluing along the spine edge.

Input Options

Report modified input files

Select this check box to see a message when an input file has changed since the
last time that you saved the job, so that you can update the run list, as needed.

Autocenter run list pages

Select this check box to automatically center all run-list pages. You can override
this on a per-page basis.

Show dimensions
Select how you prefer to see distance measurements in the workspace when the
Show Dimensions view option is turned on.
Center to center
Trim edge to trim edge

Snap
Choose the type of snapping to apply for dragging and dropping pages:
Trim to trim (default): The trim edges touch, and any inner bleed margins
are automatically removed.
Bleed to bleed: The inner bleed margins are automatically adjusted to half
their original width.
Gutters: When you specify the horizontal and vertical distances, any
overlapping bleed margins are automatically adjusted to split the width
equally

Display

Show Units
Select this check box if you want to see the units in all measurement boxes in the
workspace. Clear this check box if you want to see only the numeric values.

185
 Anti-alias Lines
Select this check box to diminish the appearance of jagged edges in the display.
This does not affect the output.

Common Preferences
You can load or save a profile from any tab in the Preferences dialog box.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences.

Profile Name
Lists the profiles that currently exist in a folder in the Profiles folder

Save Profile
Saves your current settings to a profile. In the dialog box that appears, you can
select a profile from the Profile Name list, or type a name for the new profile that
is then automatically added to the Profiles folder.

Language (Windows only)

Displays all the user interface options in the selected language.
Note: This setting does not change the measurement unit, which you can set
separately.

Stock Preferences
You can configure and set preferences for controlling stock, sections placement,
and PDF files that appear in the stock.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > Stock.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > Stock.

Sections Position in Stock

Allows you to control the placement of your sections when you build press runs.
When you select one of the nine control points, combined with the Top, Right,
Bottom, and Left options, you can define where you want the sections placed on
the stock.
Note: The values entered in the control point fields Top, Right, Bottom, and Left
options are absolute.

186
 Auto Divide and PDF Trim Size

Auto Divide Stock as Fold Patterns are added

Enables you to define how a new stock resource Variable Sheet Size reacts. You
can drag a fold pattern to the Press Run workspace where the variable sheet auto
sizes to the new fold pattern. When you add another fold pattern of the same (or
different) configuration, the variable sheet grows and splits horizontally or
vertically according to the selected placement.
Note: This split is displaced with a horizontal or vertical rule. If the rule is not
visible, make sure that Rulers are activate (Command/Control+R). Auto Divide is
only able to divide the stock into logical, equal sections. You cannot combine or
remove divided sections. For example, a Dutch cut layout that has two fold
patterns on the bottom and one centered across the top, is 90° of the first two
positions.

Auto Apply PDF TrimSize

Lets you add a PDF file to the Press Run workspace. You can drag it on top of an
existing fold pattern to have the PDF's TrimSize become the defining value for the
width and height of the Fold Pattern.
Note: This is a similar feature that is available with step-and-repeat of ganging
workflows where the auto adjustment makes it easier to go from a planned
solution to a print solution.

Step-and-Repeat Preferences
You can configure and set default values for step-and-repeat patterns. (The
software defaults are shown.)
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > Step & Repeat.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > Step & Repeat.

Step & Repeat Name

Use to define a step-and-repeat naming convention. The default value is
SnR_<n> (for example, SnR_1, SnR_2, and so on).

Arrange Pages
Use to define a default value for arranging pages:
Trim to trim
Bleed to bleed (default value)
Gutters: Define horizontal and vertical gaps between the pages. The
default value is 0, 0.
Distance: Define horizontal and vertical offset parameters. The default
value is 0, 0.

187
 New Step & Repeat Placeholder
Placeholder size: The size of a placeholder element. The default value is 8.5 in. x
11 in.
Default Placeholder position: The position of a new placeholder element in the
Press Runs view. The default value is center.

Job Report Preferences

Use these preferences to customize your reports.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > Report.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > Report.

General
You can select the type of report to generate:
Intent Based Report (default value)
Legacy Report

Company Logo
You can include your company logo on reports. Click Select, and browse to the
location of the image file for your logo.

Output Defaults
You can set defaults for layout reports:
Output to: Select a printer. Or, select to save as PDF.
Media: Default Media, if not selected in Press Runs
Orientation
Margins

Files and folders

You work with various job and setup file types, and you must configure certain
folder paths for Preps software.

File types and folder locations

As a job is processed, a variety of files are used, referenced, created, stored,
output, or destroyed. Other software-support files store the configurations and
resources that you define.
Tip: For ease of retrieval, be sure to establish and maintain a clear, consistent
approach to file naming and storing.

188
Job files
New job files (.job) that you create and save.
Input files that provide the customer content (.pdf)
Customer source-document files that you may need to convert to Adobe
Acrobat PDF input files
Existing job files (.job) that you can reopen, edit, and save
Job files (.job) that are generated by Kodak UpFront software
JDF files (.jdf) that are generated by an MIS or other system
Job output files (.jdf, .pjtf, .ps, .ppf, .pdf)

Software-support file types

SmartMark files (individual .smk files and group info.smg files)
Mark image files (.eps, .tif, .pdf)
Template files (.tpl)
Profile configuration files (.cfg)
Media configuration and device files (.ppd, .ppx)
Resource list files (.xml)
Other file types that are only accessed by Preps software

Standard file locations

Whenever the software is unable to find a folder or file that is needed, a
message prompts you to locate it.
Customer input files, job files, and output files can be stored in any
accessible folder. Network servers can be Mac OS, Microsoft Windows, or
UNIX-based.
You can use the Job File Collector utility to collect and store all the files
associated with a job.
The files that store templates, marks, media, stock, common color, folios,
fold patterns, and web-growth compensation sets must be stored in the
locations that you define on the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box.
You can use the Migration utility to move software configuration and
resource files from one installation to another.
The software installation folder structure includes files that are needed for
processing. Do not move or alter these folders unless instructed to do so.

189
 The difference between a job file and template file
Each job contains and stores its own layout information in its JOB file, and you
can optionally save a frequently repeated job as a template in a separate TPL file,
for quick reuse.
Template information that is stored in TPL files
A template can be used to set up pre-defined press-run layouts for a job,
but it has no permanent association with a JOB file or any content files.
The exception is jobs that were created using earlier versions of Preps
software, which derive their layouts from specific, referenced TPL files. If
you open and edit a legacy job, the referenced template is updated only if
you select Save As Template.
Template information that is stored in JOB files
When you save a job, its press-run layout details and content references
are all stored in the JOB file. The job can be reopened and reprinted with
the assurance that nothing has changed since you last saved it.
Note: When you apply a template resource to a job, the layouts are added
to the JOB file, and the original template is no longer referenced. If you
separately edit and resave the template that you used for this job, the
changes are not automatically applied when you reopen the job. To apply
the changes, you must reapply the template.
File compatibility between software versions
You can use the Preps 7.x software to open jobs or templates that were
created in any version of the software up to the version of the software
you have installed.
When you use the Preps 7.x software to reopen and save a legacy job (for
example, from Preps 6 or earlier), it becomes a Preps 7.x job.
You cannot use versions earlier than Preps 7.x to open Preps 7.x jobs.
You can use any version of the Preps software to open templates that
were created in any version of the software. Any unsupported features are
typically ignored.
Static marks in a legacy file will be converted to SmartMarks or deleted,
depending on the mark type.
You can open a previously output JDF file to reprint or revise the original
job.
For the most up-to-date information about compatibility with Kodak Prinergy
workflows, see the applicable release notes.
Note: The Prinergy Workshop Signature Selection and Prinergy Evo Create
Imposition features do not currently support templates that you create or edit in
Preps 6.

Folders and files that you can move or share

Instead of storing resource configurations on each computer in a networked
environment, you can store one set of shared files where multiple users can
access them. The same paths can be set on the Folders tab in the Preferences
190
 dialog box of each installation that will share folders. The following folders can be
shared as a single group.
Important: These folders must be named as shown, and must all be within the
same parent folder. Do not change the name of any of these folders.
Templates folder: Contains your templates subfolders and files (TPL).
Marks folder: Contains your mark image files (PDF, EPS).
Resources folder: Contains the XML files that store your common
colors, folios, and fold patterns.
The Marks folder has additional structural requirements:
Marks\Dupmarks: Contains your duplicating mark image files. Do not
change this folder's name or path.
Marks\SmartMarks: Contains your SmartMark files (SMK), including
any subfolders that you add. Do not change this folder's name or path.
Marks\SmartMarksMarkGroupName folders: Contain your group
member SMK files and group info.smg file. These subfolders, which you
can define as needed to create mark groups, must be in the
Marks\SmartMarks folder.
Each of the following folders can be shared from any accessible location on your
network:
Printers folder: Contains the configuration files and list that define
your media, stock, tile sets, and devices. Do not change the name of this
folder.
Note: If you move this folder, you must restart the software.
Your compensation sets folder: Contains your web growth scaling
sets. You can give this folder a name of your choice.
Notes:
These files are protected against more than one user applying edits
simultaneously, although multiple copies of a shared file can be open for
viewing. However, this does not protect against someone deleting or
moving a shared file at the operating system level while the file is being
edited.
You can create additional subfolders and move files around inside the
standard folder structure without closing the software.
Shared items are available immediately from their new locations.
You can edit, add, or delete files in these folders from any installation of
the software.
Instead of sharing folders, you can copy the contents of folders between
installations.

Sharing folders
You can set up central folders, and configure multiple installations to share the
files.

191
Using a central Mac OS, Microsoft Windows, or UNIX-based server ensures that
everyone is using the latest revision of a particular file. Depending on your
requirements, you can choose which of the following steps to implement.

1. Set up shared Templates, Marks, and Resources folders.

Note: These folders are interdependent and cannot be shared individually.
The software must be able to find these folders when it starts.
a. Choose the software installation folder that will share its templates,
marks, and other resources (common colors, folios, fold patterns).
b. Prepare the central resource lists by adding any items that need to
be shared, deleting any items that are not needed, and moving any
desired files from other installations to their respective folders at the
central installation.
Note: The correct folder names and structure are important.
c. On the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box at each installation
that will use these folders, set the new Folder Containing Template,
Marks, and Resources Folders path.
2. Set up a shared Printers folder, and/or move the files from one
installation to another.
a. Create the new Printers folder at any accessible location on your
network, or choose an existing software installation's Printers
folder.
b. At one of the installations, add any required media, stock, tile sets,
and device PPD files that you want to share or move.
c. Use the Migration tool, or manually move the contents of the
Printers folder that contains the prepared media resources to
the new folder.
Note: If you manually move the files, be sure to include all the
subfolders and all the files that are at the root of the Printers
folder, including the output resource list files: printers.psm
(media), tileset.psm (tile sets), and sheet.xml (stock).
d. On the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box at each installation
that will use this folder, set the new Printers Folder path.
e. Restart the software to activate the new location.
Note: The software must be able to find this folder when it starts.
3. Set up a shared compensation sets folder.
a. At one of the installations, prepare the scaling sets that you want to
share.
b. Move the folder that contains the sets to any accessible location on
your network, or share the folder that you prepared.
c. On the Folders tab in the Preferences dialog box at each installation
that will use this folder, set the new Web Growth Compensation
Sets Path.

4. 192
 4. Optional: Manage the Templates, Marks, Resources, Printers,
and compensation sets folders by deleting any files that will not be used by
the installations.

You can edit, add, or delete files in these folders from any installation of the
software.

Folders Preferences
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > Folders.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > Folders.

Option Description

Temporary Displays the folder that the software uses while processing
Folder files

Templates, Specify the parent folder that contains the Templates,

Marks, and Marks, and Resources folders. You can specify a central
Resources folder for multiple installations.
Folder

Printers Folder Specify the folder that stores all the media configuration and
PPD files. You can specify a central folder for multiple
installations.

Output Path Select the default location for output files. This path is
presented by default when you print to a file type.
To retain the last-used output folder as the default for the
next time you print, select the Use last location check box.
The Output Path displays Use last location instead of an
actual path. To cancel, click Select, and set the path to a fixed
location.

PDF Output Select the default location for your PDF output files.
Path

Compensation Specify the folder that stores the web-growth compensation

Sets Path sets for this installation.

193
Managing job notes
Set up the job notes to provide the content for text-mark variables. The default
note types are defined in the media PPD files, and the content can be provided
manually or derived from JDF data. You can also define new text-mark variables
and content for a specific job.
Note: If a job uses multiple media, then the job notes contain the default notes for
each media.

1. Select Job > Job Notes, or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL/CMD + J.
2. To add a custom note to the list:
In Mac OS: Click New Note, and provide the new Type and Content.
In Microsoft Windows: Provide the new values in the Type and
Content boxes, and click Add/Modify Note.
You can use literal text and text-mark variables to build a job note.
To define a new variable to use in text marks for this job, when
specifying the type, use the format $VariableName.
Note: Do not insert spaces.
3. To delete a custom job note, select the note, then click Delete Note.
Note: You cannot delete default note types, but you can edit their content.
4. To edit a note, select the note, and edit the Content.
In Windows, click Add/Modify Note.

Any custom note types and content that you create are stored with that job only.

Licensing Control dialog box

To activate a software-based license, you provide the serial number in the
Licensing Control dialog box that appears when you first start the new software.
If the installation is licensed by a workflow server, you can set the default floating-
license type, and view who is currently using each license.
When the software is running, you can use Command/Ctrl+U to access the
Licensing Control dialog box, or select Preps/Edit > License.

Software License
Select for software-based licensing.

Licensed to, Company

Provide the names.

194
Serial Number
Provide the serial number for your license that you received from Kodak, either in
an e-mail message or on Partner Place at https://partnerplace.kodak.com/ under
Service & Support > Product Registration and License Activation > View
registered products. The serial number contains a combination of capital letters
and numbers and is not case-sensitive.

License Key
After you perform the procedure to retrieve your license, your new license key
appears in this box.

Prinergy Floating License

Select for installations in workflow systems that use server-based licensing.

License Server
Select or specify the host name or IP address of the workflow server that
manages the floating licenses.

Licenses
Select the default license type, if more than one license type is available in your
system.

Type
Lists the available license types.

Available
Lists the number of floating licenses that are currently available for each type.

Total
Lists the number of installed floating licenses.

Checking the current session's status messages

Review status information about your job activities. You might need this for JDF
import diagnostics, or to review software messages for details such as missing
marks.

1. Select Windows > Show Status Window.

2. Optional: Copy the contents to a text file.

10
195
10 Automation support

Mark rules for JDF automation and AutoGang

Mark rules define the criteria that determine which SmartMarks are added when
press-run layouts are generated by AutoGang and JDF automation. Use the Mark
Rules Editor tool to configure the criteria for each rule that you create, and select
the marks and mark groups that are added by that rule.
JDF automation
The open-standard job definition format (JDF) is used by JDFcompliant systems
to communicate data and automatically trigger specific job tasks. Experienced
users with JDF training can set up profiles for varying degrees of job automation,
and they can manually intervene in automation jobs, as needed.
AutoGang
The AutoGang feature makes intelligent decisions to determine which PDF pages
constitute a complete flat-work product. It chooses the best positions for pages
on the press sheets, based on the settings and priorities that you assign. You can
review and adjust the results as needed.
AutoGang hot folders for Prinergy systems
The AutoGang feature includes a hot folder capability to fully automate job
ganging for a Prinergy workflow system. You can set up as many AutoGang
presets as needed to associate with the hot folders that you create.
Shingling and Bottling Rules Editor
Shingling and Bottling Rules define criteria that determines when auto shingling
and bottling will be applied to different job parts. Auto shingling and bottling will
only happen if you select Auto Shingling or Auto Bottling under a Job Layout
Details dialog or if the active Preps profile has -AUTOSHINGLING and -
AUTOBOTTLING set to YES.

Mark rules for JDF automation and AutoGang

Mark rules define the criteria that determine which SmartMarks are added when
press-run layouts are generated by AutoGang and JDF automation. Use the Mark
Rules Editor tool to configure the criteria for each rule that you create, and select
the marks and mark groups that are added by that rule.

Creating a mark rule

Use the Mark Rules Editor to create the rules for adding marks to autocreated
and autoganged layouts.

1. Perform one of the following actions:

Select Resources > Mark Rules Editor.

196
 1.

In the Utilities folder, double-click the

PrepsMarkRulesEditor file to start the software.
2. In Mark Rules Editor:
In Mac OS: Select PrepsMarkRulesEditor > Preferences.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Tools > Options.
3. In the Preferences dialog box, load the profile to be used and set the Unit
for specifying dimensions in the criteria settings.
4. Click [+] to add a new rule.
5. Configure the criteria in the rule settings.
It is not necessary to provide a value for each setting. For example, a
generic rule to apply crop marks to all auto-created signatures might
contain only the rule name.
6. In the SmartMarks list, choose the marks to be applied by this rule, and
drag them to the Marks to be added list.
7. Click Save Rules.
8. Repeat as needed to set up additional rules.
9. To activate the rules for JDF auto signature creation, enable the Add
SmartMarks based on mark rules option on the JDF tab of the Preferences
dialog box.

The mark rules are added to the markrules.xml file in the Printers
folder.
For JDF auto signature creation, rules are applied based on the JDF data's
work style, binding type, front and back colors, and sheet size (or size
range).
For AutoGang, rules are applied based on the flat work binding style and
specified sheet size in the AutoGang Preset.
When more than one rule matches a press run, all matching rules are
applied.

Criteria for mark rules

Rule Parameters
Use the following settings as criteria for AutoGang and JDF automation.

Rule Name
Give the rule a descriptive name.

Product Type
Select an option to identify the product type: commercial print or packaging.

197
Part Type
Select an option to identify the part type:
Cover
Text
Flat Work
Folding Carton
Labels
Tags
Bags

Workstyle
Not specified (Any binding style qualifies as a match.)
Sheetwise
Work and Turn
Work and Tumble
Single-Sided
Perfector

Binding Type
Not specified
Flat Work (This is the only binding type that the AutoGang feature uses.)
Perfect Bound
Saddle-Stitched
Come and Go
Cut and Stack
Mixed

[Device] Name
Use to define a Device ID, so Preps software can look for the device specified:
Press Name
Output Device Name
Page Proof Device Name
Imposition Proof Device Name
Folder Name
Cutter Name
Bindery Name
198
 Stock Name
Use to identify a paper type.

Number of Sections
Use to idenfity the number of sections on a sheet.

Number of Webs
Use to identify the number of web units; can be taken from the REM press setting
in Prinergy workflow.

Sheet Size (Min) W and H

The dimensions of the smallest press sheet to which this rule applies

Sheet Size (Max) W and H

The dimensions of the largest press sheet to which this rule applies

Criteria for auto signature creation

The following settings are specific to the auto signature creation (ASC) feature.

Press Device ID
Device ID that the MIS software assigns to this device. If no device is specified,
then all devices are considered.

Front Colors
Number of colors on the front side of the job that are described in the JDF file

Back Colors
Number of colors on the back side of the job that are described in the JDF file

JDF automation
The open-standard job definition format (JDF) is used by JDF-compliant systems
to communicate data and automatically trigger specific job tasks. Experienced
users with JDF training can set up profiles for varying degrees of job automation,
and they can manually intervene in automation jobs, as needed.

199
JDF jobs
In a JDF workflow, the management information system (MIS) sends you a JDF
file that represents the job ticket and specifies the imposition requirements in its
stripping data. Incoming JDF files can contain enough product intent to
autogenerate the Press Runs List via template-signature matching or creation,
and you can add or edit details as needed.
The currently loaded profile determines the type of automation that is applied
when a JDF file is opened, based on the JDF tab settings in the Preferences dialog
box.
When you open an MIS JDF file, the software immediately examines the JDF data
(stripping parameters) and attempts to resolve the requirements using a specific
sequence, depending on the profile.
Manually matching the source JDF values
You can manually edit the product intent to match the JDF values when:
The profile is configured for matching only, and no suitable template is
found.
The profile is configured for signature matching or creation, and the JDF
data is not complete.
The original intent needs to be updated with last-minute change requests.
When the product intent is fully defined, you can generate the Press Runs List.
When structural changes are needed
When necessary, you can make structural changes, such as to accommodate an
increased page count. Before proceeding, determine whether the customer
service representative will send you new or updated JDF data to replace this job,
or whether you will change the job manually. The Preps software can manage
stock introduced by a JDF without having it added to the stock list. You can edit
the on-the-fly stock property, and have it written back to the JDF.
You can manually specify the new product intent in the Assembly view, and
create the additional press-run layout in the Press Runs view. Although the
printed result might be correct, the new press run will have no association with
the original JDF stripping parameters, and the JDF output will contain an
unrequested press run.
Tips for optimal results
The JDF data that you receive can vary in structure and content between MIS
systems and jobs. Even when the data is very comprehensive, mismatched
properties can result if the profile requires several mandatory criteria with a low
tolerance for differences.
And even if the JDF data and the profile have minimal requirements and the
press-run layouts are easily autogenerated, the impositions might not be suitable.
In that case, you might need to compare the JDF values of nonmandatory settings
with the autoselected values, and then manually edit the settings to match more
of the JDF values.
Here are some suggestions for achieving better results:

200
 Store suitable JDF settings in custom profiles, so that the generated
impositions will be compliant with downstream systems.
Configure additional profiles, and switch between them as needed.
For auto signature matching, maintain a well-organized collection of
layout resources (templates).
For more accurate matching, create a profile that uses all or most of the
Matching Criteria and a fairly strict Match Tolerance.
For easier matching (with the risk of unsuitable results), use fewer
Matching Criteria and a more lenient Match Tolerance.

Completing a JDF job

After opening a JDF file, you can check the autogenerated layouts, compare the
current settings with the source JDF values, and make any necessary adjustments
before you print the output.
Note: For auto signature creation, define the mark rules that will add the correct
marks to the autogenerated layouts.
Use any of these steps that apply to your situation, based on your awareness of
the type of JDF data that you receive from your MIS.
For example, if the JDF data is consistently well defined, you might proceed to
print the generated press-run layouts, with or without first checking the results.

1. In the Preferences dialog box, load a suitable profile or set options as

needed on the JDF tab.
a. Choose the automation type:
For auto signature creation (ASC) only, select Create Only.
For auto signature matching (ASM) only, select Match only.
For the most flexible automation, select Match then create
(ASM/C).
b. Select the matching criteria that are mandatory, and set the Match
Tolerance level.
2. Select File > Open, then locate and open the JDF file.
The job notes are updated with the JDF file name, descriptive name, and
MIS job ID, if provided. The run list is populated with PDF pages if the JDF
includes a reference to the input files; otherwise, blank pages fill the
specified page count.
The results and your next actions depend on the JDF data contents and the
profile settings. Depending on the configured auto generation type, the
software tries to resolve the requirements in the following sequence:

If the JDF For: The software: Typical next steps

data
contains:

201
If the JDF For: The software: Typical next steps
data
contains:

A ASM, Ignores the profile settings, Check the

reference ASC, and generates the assembly generated press
to a valid ASM and press runs based on the runs in the Press
template /C referenced template Runs view, and
that is in make any
the necessary
Templates adjustments before
folder printing.

Sufficient ASM Based on the Matching Check the

stripping Criteria, tries to match the generated press
data, no mandatory JDF values to the runs in the Press
template values in an existing Runs view,
reference template (within the compare the JDF
profile's Match Tolerance values and settings
limit) and if successful, in the Properties
generates the assembly and pane, and make
press runs based on the any necessary
template adjustments before
printing.
If ASM was
unsuccessful, you
can manually
complete the job.

  ASM Based on the Matching Check the

/C Criteria, tries to match the generated press
mandatory JDF values to the runs in the Press
values in an existing Runs view,
template (within the compare the JDF
profile's Match Tolerance values and settings
limit) and if unsuccessful, in the Properties
generates the assembly and pane, and make
press runs based on the JDF any necessary
values adjustments before
printing.
If ASM was
unsuccessful, you
can manually
complete the job.

  ASC

202
 If the JDF For: The software: Typical next steps
data
contains:

Applies the JDF values to Check the

the intent properties, and generated press
generates the assembly and runs in the Press
press runs Runs view,
compare the JDF
values and settings
in the Properties
pane, and make
any necessary
adjustments before
printing.
If ASM was
unsuccessful, you
can manually
complete the job.

Insufficient ASM, Highlights the missing Obtain the missing

stripping ASC, properties and generates a customer
data ASM minimal assembly or no requirements for
/C assembly the product intent,
update the
properties, and
generate and check
the press runs
before printing.

3. In the Assembly view, check the generated product assembly and intent
settings:
a. In the workspace, review the product structure that was derived
from the JDF data.
b. In the Properties pane, expand the Source JDF Values column.
c. For each product, part, and section, individually compare the current
property settings with the source JDF values, and edit or complete
the settings as needed.
The Properties pane highlights any mandatory settings that are not
within the profile's defined JDF Match Tolerance level for its
Matching Criteria selections. You can edit or specify values for
mandatory and non-mandatory settings.
Note: Skip the next step if the press runs were already
autogenerated and no edits are required.

4. 203
 4. Click Generate Press Runs.
If the press-run layouts are successfully generated, the view switches to
the Press Runs view. If they fail to be generated, you can edit the settings
and try again, or switch to Press Runs view and manually complete the job.

5. In the Press Runs view, check the autogenerated press-run layouts and
make any changes needed for production, such as to change the stock
selection.
6. Print the output.

JDF Preferences
Use the JDF tab in the Preferences dialog box to define how the software
automates JDF-based jobs, and optionally save the settings in a custom profile.
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > JDF.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > JDF.

Signature Creation
Choose the automation method used to build the Press Runs List:

Match only
Always attempt to build the Press Runs List by matching the requirements to
existing template signatures, and never automatically create press-run layouts.
This is also known as auto signature matching (ASM).

Create only
Always build the Press Runs List by autocreating the layouts; ignore any
templates that are in the Templates folder. This is also known as auto signature
creation (ASC).

Match then create

Always build the Press Runs List by first mtaching the requirements to existing
template signatures (ASC), and create a press-run layout only when unable to
find a match (ASC).

Matching Criteria
Choose the characteristics that will be used as criteria for matching the source
JDF values to the automatically selected or generated template signatures:

Check sheet size

Matches only to template signatures that use the same press sheet size (stock)
as specified in the source JDF

204
Check work style
Matches only to template signatures that use the same work style as specified in
the source JDF

Match finishing properties to fold pattern templates

If the source JDF specifies finishing property values such as trims, matches only
to a template signature that uses a fold pattern, and ignores any gutter-based
impositions

Check head and foot trim

Available only if Match finishing properties to fold pattern templates is selected.
Matches only to a template signature that uses the same head and foot trim
values as specified in the source JDF.

Check fold pattern

Matches only to a template signature that uses the same fold pattern as specified
in the source JDF

Check fold orientation

Available only if Check fold orientation is selected. Matches only to a template
signature that uses the same fold pattern with the same rotate and flip
coordinates as specified in the source JDF. The bindery uses this information to
transform the production signature as it comes off the press to its final product
orientation.

Match Tolerance
Decrease this tolerance to a stricter level for more precise matching, or increase
it to a more lenient level to increase the likelihood of successful matching.

Signature Creation Marks

Add SmartMarks based on mark rules

Select this check box when you are ready to activate your mark rules.

Add JDF error marks

Clear this check box to suppress error messages in text marks, which can appear
when the JDF geometry specifications include incomplete or inconsistent
information. If this check box is selected, you can manually delete the error
marks.

205
 Error Mark Tolerance
If Add JDF error marks is selected, set the tolerance level to "allow" before adding
the error mark.

JDF Input

Use bleed values in JDF

The bleed values defined in the JDF will be honored when the JDF is imported into
Preps.

Remove all marks

When referencing or matching an existing Preps template in your MIS JDF, you
can select this option to remove all marks on the existing template and replace
them with SmartMarks based on marks rules.

JDF Output

Format the output based on this specification

JDF version 1.2 (software default)
JDF version 1.3
JDF version 1.4

Use relative paths for marks

If selected, formats the URL for the location of the marks as a path that is relative
to the location of the JDF output file.

Use relative paths for input files

If selected, formats the URL for the location of the content input files as a path
that is relative to the current location of the JDF file.

JDF output
You can print JDF output from any job, including jobs that were not based on MIS
JDF data. You can save a JDF-based job as a regular JOB file, and you can also
print it to any of the supported output types.
JDF output files contain all the information needed to re-open and automatically
reconstruct the job, for example, if a job needs to be re-plated. This is referred to
as JDF roundtripping.
JDF output can be generated from any job, including jobs that were not started
from JDF data. Other features of JDF output include:

206
 If fold patterns are used, fold information is included in JDF output for use
by JDF-enabled bindery equipment.

Color mapping and web-growth compensation are supported and can be

configured in the Print dialog box.
In the Print dialog box, you can export CIP3 cutting data by embedding it
inside the JDF output file or by printing the job twice: once to JDF, and
once to PPF. Your method depends on the postpress system capabilities.
If the MIS JDF includes CIP4 folding data for setting up CIP4-compliant
folding equipment, it is passed through in the JDF output.
Any Run Length values that you specify in a job's Press Runs List are
included in the JDF output, in the Layout/Signature/@SSi:
RunLength attribute.

AutoGang
The AutoGang feature makes intelligent decisions to determine which PDF pages
constitute a complete flat-work product. It chooses the best positions for pages
on the press sheets, based on the settings and priorities that you assign. You can
review and adjust the results as needed.

Creating an AutoGang preset

AutoGang presets apply specific settings and optimization priorities.
Note: The default profile and any custom profiles share the same AutoGang
presets, which are stored in a special configuration file called Autoganging.
cfg.

1. Select Resources > AutoGang Presets.

2. Select a preset and choose a task:
To add a new AutoGang preset based on the currently selected
preset, click [+].
To modify the currently selected preset, click Edit.
3. Specify a name, and choose the media and stock that this preset will apply.
4. Specify the margins that will determine the dimensions of the imageable
area on the sheet.
5. Choose the work style.
If you select a two-sided work style, products will be autoganged in front-
and-back content page pairs.
6. Set the default gap limit between pages.
Any bleed margins that are wider than this limit will be adjusted to fit this
space.

7. 207
 7. Choose whether AutoGang should optimize for digital printing (zero
makeready), offset printing (default makeready), or print cost (actual
calculated make ready).
If you choose to optimize for cost, you must enter the total costs for press
runs for quantities of 1000 sheets and 2000 sheets (including all costs
that you want considered in the calculations).
Note: The default offset printing option adds 200 sheets to the run length
quantity as an approximation of makeready time and materials, or waste
per press run.

8. Specify the step direction for the autoganged layout of multiple-up

products on a press run.
Note: This can depend on whether an automatic or manual cutter is used.
Choose a specific direction if the items must be adjacent, to form
blocks with horizontal or vertical cut lines.
If a specific direction is not required, allow the software to calculate
the layouts based on cut efficiency.
This can result in horizontal or vertical cut lines (or both) on a
layout.
9. If you choose cut efficiency, use the slider to indicate whether the
autocalculation should make a quick decision or take more time to create a
more efficient layout.
10. If products or cut blocks can be rotated for the best fit, select the Allow
Rotation check box, or clear it to prevent rotation.
11. Choose if files will be autoganged on a first-in, first-out basis.
If selected, the file that was in the hot folder for the longest time is
included in the autoganged layout. Other files might also be included,
depending on your optimization and step direction choices.
Note: Skip this step if you are not using AutoGang hot folders in a Prinergy
workflow.
12. To create a new preset based on these settings, click Save as Preset.

Generating autoganged press runs

1. Set up the AutoGang tab in the Preferences dialog box.
2. Use the Mark Rules Editor to configure rules for automatically adding
marks to the generated press runs.
3. Set up the Files list.
4. Click the AutoGang tool to generate the job's AutoGang list.
All Files list pages are automatically added to the job's AutoGang list. Each
single-sided page or two-sided page pair is considered to be one flat-work
product, and each row displays information about one flat-work product.
5. Review and adjust the list as needed:

208
 5.

What you Description

can do

Select the Accept, change, or edit the AutoGang Preset selection as

AutoGang needed for this job.
preset

Check When the selected preset uses a two-sided work style, the
front and pages are autopaired in front and back page positions. Each
back page even-numbered page is assigned to the back of its
pairs preceding odd-numbered page.
Tip: You can change the way a product is paired by
dragging a product row to anywhere else in the list to create
two new products with content on the front only. Dragging
one of these rows onto another blank-backed product
replaces its blank back with the dragged content.

Select Select the check boxes to include the products in this

products ganging session. Products with cleared check boxes will be
for ignored.
ganging

Set the Use one of these methods (it does not matter if the check
quantities box is selected or cleared):
Double-click in the Quantity column, type a new
value, and tab to the next row.
Select multiple products that require the same
quantity by clicking on the front page names (not
the check boxes), then click Set Quantity, and type
the value.

6. To generate the layouts for the selected products, click Gang.

7. Review and adjust the results as needed.
The number of generated press runs depends on the job size and the
settings in the Preferences dialog box. The generated press run names are
appended with the press run lengths.
8. Save the job and print the output.

AutoGang Preferences
In Mac OS: Select Preps > Preferences > AutoGang.
In Microsoft Windows: Select Edit > Preferences > AutoGang.

209
 Replace current sheet(s)
Select or clear the check box, depending on whether existing press-run layouts
are to be replaced or retained.
Note: If this check box is cleared, the default press run that is available in every
new job must be manually deleted.

Press Sheet Generation

Use the check boxes to specify whether to generate all the layouts for the entire
AutoGang list.
Tip: Clear the Replace current sheet(s) check box, generate first best sheets for
different combinations of settings, and compare the results before generating all
the layouts with the Create multiple sheets option.

Create multiple sheets (for selected products)

Generates press runs to lay out all the AutoGang products

Create first best sheet

Autoselects products and generates only the best possible ganged layout, based
on the current settings. Any products that do not fit are not placed.

AutoGang hot folders for Prinergy systems

The AutoGang feature includes a hot folder capability to fully automate job
ganging for a Prinergy workflow system. You can set up as many AutoGang
presets as needed to associate with the hot folders that you create.

Setting the root hot folder

After you specify a root hot folder location locally or on a server, Preps software
watches the hot folders for input files, generates layouts based on a hot folder’s
associated AutoGang presets, and places the output files in the specified folder
locations. All AutoGang hot folders must reside within the same root folder
location, which is used by all profiles.

1. On the AutoGang tab in the Preferences dialog box, click Select, and locate
the root hot folder that will contain all the individual hot folders that you
create on your computer or a server on your network.
Click New Folder, as needed, if the folder does not exist.

Tip: For network locations, use the SMB protocol to connect to the server.

Setting up an AutoGang hot folder

You can set up as many AutoGang hot folders as needed for your operations,
with one or more quantity-based folders per hot folder.
210
Adding PDF input files to a quantity-based folder automatically sets the number
of copies to be printed. Each hot folder scans and prints the contents of its
quantity folders according to the schedule that you set up. You also specify the
AutoGang preset to be used by each hot folder, as well as the output file type and
the folders where the job, product, and output files are automatically placed when
the job is finished.
New hot folders that you set up following this procedure are automatically
created inside the Root Hot Folder path that you define in the Preferences dialog
box.

1. From within Prinergy Workshop software, open Preps software.

2. Expand the AutoGang resource pane to display the categorized hot folders
that are currently defined in the AutoGang resource list. This list initially
contains no hot folders. As you configure and add hot folders to the
AutoGang resource list, they are automatically listed under the Manual
print or Automatic print category, depending on your hot folder settings.
3. To create and configure a new hot folder, click [+].
4. At the top of the settings dialog box that appears, give your new hot folder
a descriptive name.
Tip: Keep in mind that Mac OS file names are limited to a total of 32
characters. The date and time of printing are automatically added to
AutoGang output file names, which leaves only up to 13 characters for the
hot folder name portion, depending on the file name extension.
5. Choose the AutoGang Preset that this hot folder uses.
6. In the Scan every box, specify how frequently (number of minutes) the
software should scan the hot folder for new files.
7. In the Quantity Folders area, type a value for each quantity-based
subfolder that this hot folder requires.
Click [+] to add more quantity folders, as needed.
8. In the Print Options area, select the Output Type that this hot folder
generates: JDF, PJTF, or PDF.
9. Specify where this hot folder places each type of generated file when it
completes a job.

This folder Collects these files types:

location:

Output ganged The generated JDF, PJTF, or PDF output files

layout to

Move product The PDF input files that have been ganged
files to

Output Preps . The automatically saved Preps job files

job files to

211
 This folder Collects these files types:
location:

Output PPF to Select this check box if Print Production Format (PPF)
check box output files will also be generated.
You can then locate the folder where PPF files are to
be placed.

You can add new folders to collect these files in any accessible location or
various locations in the network. Give the folders names that are
meaningful for your purposes.
10. Choose a print option, depending on whether you want to preview the
layouts.

Choose To do this:
this
option:

Manual Preview each generated layout, and make any adjustments

Print needed. When you are satisfied with the layouts, manually
print the output. For manual printing, there are no further
settings to specify.

Automatic Save the job and generate the autoganged layouts

Print automatically, with no manual intervention. Selecting this
option activates additional options.

Your choice determines the category under which this hot folder appears
in the AutoGang resource list.
Note: Jobs created via hot folder cannot be manually saved, to be
consistent with the automated hot-folder file management.
11. For automatic printing only, set the schedule for automatically generating
the output when sheet utilization is above the minimum percentage that
you specify.
You can choose to print the output immediately, every specified number of
hours, at a specific time each weekday (Monday to Friday), or at a specific
time every day (Monday to Sunday). Printing takes place when your
specified sheet utilization percentage is reached. The files are then placed
in the folders that you defined.
12. Click OK, and verify that the new hot folder appears in the AutoGang
resource list.
13. To refresh the hot folder AutoGang list, click Rescan.
Tip: Double-clicking a hot folder in the AutoGang list pauses the hot folder
and changes the appearance of the icon. Double-clicking it again
reactivates it.

212
Autoganging a job for Prinergy

1. Place the PDF input files into a suitable quantity-based folder within an
AutoGang hot folder.Note: Input files must be single-page PDF files (for
single-sided work style) or two-page PDF files (for two-sided work style).
Files with more than two pages (or more than one in a single-sided hot
folder) are moved to the error folder, because parts of a file cannot be
ganged independently.

2. If this is a manual print job, open Preps software from within Prinergy
Workshop software, and check the generated layouts before saving and
printing the job.

3. For the first few autogang jobs that you run, verify that the output files
were generated and placed in the configured folder locations.
The output file names automatically include date, time, and hot folder
name, in this format:
<YYMMDDHHmm_nn_<HotFolderName>, where <nn> represents the
incremented file ID number.Note: You cannot currently change the way
that output files are named.For information about processing the final
output in Prinergy, see the documentation for Prinergy.

Shingling and Bottling Rules Editor

Use the Shingling and Bottling Rules Editor to create the rules for applying
shingling or bottling automatically to job parts.

1. Select Resources > Shingling and Bottling Rules Editor.

2. To add a new rule, click +.

3. In the rule settings, configure the criteria for the new rule.

Rule Name  

213
 3.

Caliper The caliper of the stock that the rule applies to.

Shingling and/or To enable them, select the Shingling and/or

Bottling Bottling check boxes.

Shingling (Creep) Select the binding styles the rule applies to and set
the criteria.

Select Inner, Outer, or Both.

For each binding, set the page count the rule

applies to.

Bottling Select the binding styles the rule applies to and set
the criteria.

Select Inner, Outer, or Both.

For each binding, set the page count the rule

applies to.

Set the Ratio for each binding style.

4. Save the rule.

When the rule is saved, it will appear under the Stock resources if it applies
to the stock. Under the Stock Properties column, it will indicate Automatic
Shingling and/or Automatic Bottling.
5. To apply the rule perform one of these actions:
To apply the rule manually, in a Job Layout Details dialog box,
select Auto Shingling or Auto Bottling.
To apply the rule automatically, in your Preps profile, set -
AUTOSHINGLING and -AUTOBOTTLING to YES. When new jobs
are created, the Auto Shingling and Auto Bottling will be
automatically set in the Job Layout Details.

11
214
11 Shortcuts

User interface viewing tools

Click the triangles and stretch the dividers to fit the window panes to your needs.

1 Click a triangle to expand or collapse a list tree

2 Drag a divider to stretch or shrink a pane

3 Expand a pane to hide the adjacent panes

4 Click a tab to switch views

5 Click the triangle to reverse a column's sort order

6 Drag the column edges to adjust their widths

7 Drag the column headers to rearrange the columns

8 Click a triangle to stretch or shrink a column

215
Menu shortcuts - Windows OS-based computers

To do this: First: Then press these

keys:

Select all same-type objects Select an object Ctrl A

Select all   Ctrl A

Locate and add files Open or start a job Alt+Ctrl A

Generate the job's AutoGang Set up the Files list Shift+Ctrl A

list

Insert new web (at your   Ctrl B

current active Press Run)

Duplicate web (at your   Shift+Ctrl B

current active Press Run)

Copy Select an object Ctrl C

Duplicate or step and repeat Select an object Ctrl D

Auto-center a page in the   Shift+Ctrl D

width and height of a stock

Flip the sheet in the Display the press run Ctrl F

workspace

Group Select pages Ctrl G

Ungroup Select a page group Shift+Ctrl U

Generate press runs Define the product Shift+Ctrl G

intent (part and section
properties)

Access Layout Details   Ctrl I

Access Job Notes   Ctrl J

  Ctrl K

216
To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Open the Preferences dialog

box

Lock Select an object Ctrl L

Unlock Select a locked object Shift+Ctrl L

Open the Create imposition   Ctrl M

dialog box

Start a new job   Ctrl N

Locate and open a job   Ctrl O

Open the Print dialog box   Ctrl P

Open the Print Job Layout   Shift+Ctrl P

Report dialog box

Close the software   Ctrl Q

Save this job   Ctrl S

Save this job as...   Shift+Ctrl S

Add a new empty press run   Ctrl T

(sheetfed)

Duplicate this press run Select a press run Shift+Ctrl T

(sheetfed or web type)

Open the Licensing Control   Ctrl U

dialog box

Ungroup Select a page group Shift+Ctrl U

Paste Select an object Ctrl V

Close this job Save current job Ctrl W

Cut Select an object Ctrl X

217
To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Undo (if action is undoable)   Ctrl Z

Align selected objects:      

Align left   Shift

Align top   Shift

Align right   Shift

Align bottom   Shift

Redo   Shift+Ctrl Z

Expand a resource pane:      

Expand the Media list   Ctrl 1

Expand the Stock list   Ctrl 2

Expand the Marks list   Ctrl 3

Expand the Layouts pane   Ctrl 4

Expand the AutoGang pane   Ctrl 5

Zoom:      

Zoom in/out Optional: Select an Ctrl + (plus)

object /–
(minus)

Fit in window   Ctrl 0

View at actual dimensions Select an object Alt+Ctrl 0

Other keyboard shortcuts      

  Ctrl ?

218
 To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Help (user guide and other

information)

Display next press run   Shift+Ctrl >

Display previous press run   Shift+Ctrl <

Show or hide a user interface      

region:

Show or hide the lists of job   Ctrl

assets at the left side.

Show or hide the workspace   Ctrl

and list areas of the center
region.

Show or hide the properties of   Ctrl

selected job elements at the
right side.

Menu shortcuts - Mac OS

Keyboard symbols:
Command
Shift
Option

Control

To do this: First: Then press these

keys:

Select all same-type Select an object A

objects

Select all   A

Locate and add files Open or start a job Control+ A

219
To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Generate the job's Set up the Files list Option+ A

AutoGang list

Insert new web (at your   B

current active Press Run)

Duplicate web (at your   Shift+ B

current active Press Run)

Copy Select an object C

Duplicate or step and Select an object D

repeat

Auto-center a page in the   Control+ D

width and height of a
stock

Flip the sheet in the Display the press F

workspace run

Group Select pages G

Ungroup Select a page group Shift+ G

Generate press runs Define the product Option+ G

intent (part and
section properties)

Access Layout Details   I

Access Job Notes   J

Lock Select an object L

Unlock Select a locked Shift+ L

object

Start a new job   N

Locate and open a job   O

220
To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Open the Print dialog box   P

Open the Print Job Layout   Shift+ P

Report dialog box

Close the software   Q

Save this job   S

Save this job as...   Shift+ S

Add a new empty press   T

run (sheetfed)

Duplicate this press run Select a press run Shift+ T

(sheetfed or web
type)

Open the Licensing   U

Control dialog box

Paste   V

Close this job Save current job W

Cut Select an object X

Undo (if action is   Z

undoable)

Redo   Shift+ Z

Align selected objects:      

Align left   Shift

Align top   Shift

Align right   Shift

221
To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Align bottom   Shift

Expand a resource pane:      

Expand the Media list   1

Expand the Stock list   2

Expand the Marks list   3

Expand the Layouts pane   4

Expand the AutoGang   5

pane

Zoom:      

Zoom in/out Optional: Select an + (plus)

object /–
(minus)

Fit in window   0

View at actual Select an object Option+ 0

dimensions

Other keyboard shortcuts      

Open the Preferences   ,

dialog box (comma)

Help (user guide and   ?

other information)

Display next press run   Shift+ >

Display previous press   Shift+ <

run

222
 To do this: First: Then press these
keys:

Show or hide a user      

interface region:

Show or hide the lists of  

job assets at the left side.

Show or hide the  

workspace and list areas
of the center region.

Show or hide the  

properties of selected job
elements at the right side.

Other shortcuts
This table summarizes other shortcuts that use the keyboard, mouse, or both.
Note: In these shortcuts, a + (plus sign) is used to mean and—it does not mean to
press the + (plus) key.

To achieve Use this shortcut: Description

this:

Viewing    
and
selecting
items

Select an Use the Page  

imposition Select tool, and
page within click the page
a page grid

Select Press Shift + click  

multiple the items, or drag
pages, a marquee around
sections, or them
marks

Use a dash to indicate a range, and use a

comma to separate multiple values (1-4,9-
12,21-24). Do not insert spaces.

223
To achieve Use this shortcut: Description
this:

Select all In the Pages List,

odd, even, right-click the
or ranges product or part,
of pages in and select an
a run list option

Select a Mac OS: + Allows you to view and edit the fold mark
fold mark Shift + click properties
Windows: Alt +
click

Zoom in Roll the mouse Increases or decreases the zoom as you roll
and out wheel the mouse wheel

Pan your Press the space Moves the press sheet in the same way as
current bar + drag an the Pan tool
view object in the
workspace

Editing    

Edit a Select a page in Activates the editable text boxes in the

layout's the workspace workspace, depending on the current View
page menu selections, and displays the Content
properties Page and Template Page settings in the
Properties pane

Edit a Double-click a Displays the selected mark's settings in the

layout's mark in the Properties pane
mark workspace

Edit a Right-click the Displays a context menu from which you

reusable item in the can choose Edit
media, corresponding list
stock, or in the Resources
mark pane
resource

Edit a In the workspace, Activates the editable text boxes in the

press-run select the section workspace, depending on the current View
section's menu selections, and displays its settings in
trims the Properties pane

Displays its settings in the Properties pane

224
To achieve Use this shortcut: Description
this:

Edit a From any view,

product select the section
section in the Products
list.

Edit an Double-click the Displays the Edit Imposition dialog box

imposition imposition
on a layout

Edit a From any view, Displays its settings in the Properties pane.
product or select the product Structural edits of multi-part products can
product or part in the be made only in the Assembly view, such as
part Products list. changing the page count

Edit Select the page in Displays the page and trim boxes in the
content the Pages List Preview pane (depending on View menu
trim boxes settings) and its run-list page settings in the
Properties pane

Edit a press Select the press Displays its settings in the Properties pane.
run's run in the Press You can also edit certain settings directly in
settings Runs List the list row.

Edit gutters In the workspace, Displays its editable gutter or trim text
in a layout select the press- boxes in the workspace and Properties pane
run section

Edit a In the Media list, Displays the Punch Location dialog box
media's right-click the
punch media, select Edit,
location and in the Media
Configuration
dialog box, click
Punch Location.

Edit a In the workspace, Displays its settings in the Properties pane,

layout's select the stock. including the editable Punch Distance
distance
between
the sheet
edge and
the media
punch

225
To achieve Use this shortcut: Description
this:

Moving    
items

Move a Press Shift + drag Moves a page to a position that is on the X

page along a page or Y axis of its original position. If you move
its axis the page diagonally, it snaps to its nearest
original axis.

Nudge an Select the item Moves the selected, unlocked page or mark
item and use the arrow in the direction of the arrow
keys

Override Mac OS: + drag Drags the selected page without regard to
the snap Windows: Ctrl + snap settings. When you release the mouse,
behavior drag the page remains exactly where it is instead
of snapping to the nearest available grid
line.

Replacing    
items

Replace a Drag the new Replaces that page and any other page on
content page over the old the press sheet that has the same template
page in a page until the number. Retains the original template page
layout recycle symbol properties for each replaced page.
appears, then
drop.

Replace Mac OS: + Replaces only the page with a recycling

content on drag symbol on it, even if it is in a group. Does
only one of Windows: Alt + not affect any other pages with the same
multiple drag template page number. Assigns the next
same- available template page number to the new
numbered page. Works only for pages dragged from
template the file list.
pages

Replace a Double-click the Replaces a stock or media without removing

stock or new item in the any placed pages
media in a Stock or Media
layout list

Removes any placed pages and replaces the

existing layout resources in the workspace

226
To achieve Use this shortcut: Description
this:

Replace a Double-click the

press-run new template
layout signature in the
Templates list

Replace Job > Replace File Replaces the file placeholder with content. If
selected Placeholder the new file is larger or smaller than the
file list placeholder, a message asks you what to do
placeholder with the extra pages in the larger file.
with
content

Creating    
duplicates

Duplicate a Mac OS: + Places a copy of the original page, with

selected drag content, where you release the mouse
page once Windows: Alt +
drag

Duplicate a Mac OS: + D Displays a dialog box with the step-and-

selected Windows: Ctrl + repeat options
page via D
step and
repeat

Duplicate a Mac OS: + D Adds and selects the duplicated press-run

selected Windows: Ctrl + layout, without content
press run D

Copy a Mac OS: + C, Inserts a copy of the press run or places a

selected +V copy of the page where you release the
press run Windows: Ctrl + mouse, with content
or ganged C, Ctrl + V
page

Deleting    
pages

Delete the Press Delete. Deletes the selected template page and its
entire content. This does not affect the Files list.
selected
page from
a layout

227
To achieve Use this shortcut: Description
this:

Remove Mac OS: + Removes only the selected content page

only the Delete and not its template page. If used on a page
content Windows: Alt + group, removes all the content pages and
from a Delete retains the template pages.
selected
page on a
layout

228